WO2019137316A1 - 一种通信方法及设备 - Google Patents

一种通信方法及设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019137316A1
WO2019137316A1 PCT/CN2019/070510 CN2019070510W WO2019137316A1 WO 2019137316 A1 WO2019137316 A1 WO 2019137316A1 CN 2019070510 W CN2019070510 W CN 2019070510W WO 2019137316 A1 WO2019137316 A1 WO 2019137316A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
modulation
coding mode
dci
mcs
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2019/070510
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
邵家枫
吕永霞
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP19739149.3A priority Critical patent/EP3734877A4/en
Priority to BR112020014167-4A priority patent/BR112020014167A2/pt
Priority to JP2020538050A priority patent/JP7027669B2/ja
Publication of WO2019137316A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019137316A1/zh
Priority to US16/925,670 priority patent/US11362758B2/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0002—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the transmission rate
    • H04L1/0003—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the transmission rate by switching between different modulation schemes
    • H04L1/0004—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the transmission rate by switching between different modulation schemes applied to control information
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621—Feedback content
    • H04B7/0626—Channel coefficients, e.g. channel state information [CSI]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0002—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the transmission rate
    • H04L1/0003—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the transmission rate by switching between different modulation schemes
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0009—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the channel coding
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0015—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff characterised by the adaptation strategy
    • H04L1/0016—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff characterised by the adaptation strategy involving special memory structures, e.g. look-up tables
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0023—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff characterised by the signalling
    • H04L1/0028—Formatting
    • H04L1/0031—Multiple signaling transmission
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0023—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff characterised by the signalling
    • H04L1/0032—Without explicit signalling
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/1607—Details of the supervisory signal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
    • H04L1/1812—Hybrid protocols; Hybrid automatic repeat request [HARQ]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
    • H04L1/1812—Hybrid protocols; Hybrid automatic repeat request [HARQ]
    • H04L1/1819—Hybrid protocols; Hybrid automatic repeat request [HARQ] with retransmission of additional or different redundancy
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
    • H04L1/1867—Arrangements specially adapted for the transmitter end
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/50—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wire-line communication networks, e.g. low power modes or reduced link rate

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
  • the international telecommunication union defines three types of application scenarios for the fifth generation mobile communication system (the fifth generation, 5G) and future mobile communication systems: enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), Ultra reliable and low latency communications (URLLC) and massive machine type communications (mMTC).
  • eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
  • URLLC Ultra reliable and low latency communications
  • mMTC massive machine type communications
  • the URLLC service requires extremely high latency, and the one-way transmission delay from the sender to the receiver is required to be within 0.5 milliseconds (millisecond, ms), and the transmission reliability is 99.999% within 1 ms.
  • the new 5G wireless technology (new radio, NR) is adopted.
  • the URLCC can support the modulation of the block error rate (BLER).
  • MCS coding coding scheme
  • the terminal device may perform processing such as modulation coding or demodulation decoding of the data according to some MCS information in the MCS table.
  • the network device and the terminal device In order for the network device and the terminal device to select the same MCS information, the network device and the terminal device also need to determine the MCS table.
  • the manner in which the currently supported network device notifies the terminal device of the MCS table is that the high-level signaling is used for notification, and the terminal device uses the previous MCS table by default before receiving the new high-level signaling notification.
  • the URLLC service has a high latency requirement.
  • the network device needs to dynamically and dynamically select the MCS information to be used according to the actual situation of the terminal device within the low latency requirement of the URLLC service.
  • the terminal device is notified of the used MCS table in a semi-static manner by the high-level signaling, and the MCS table and the corresponding MCS information that the network device flexibly selects for the terminal device cannot be implemented. It can be seen that the current network device notifies the terminal device of the MCS information. The way can not adapt to the needs of the URLLC business.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method and device, which are used to better notify a terminal device of a selected method of modulation and coding mode information to better adapt to a requirement of a URLLC service.
  • a communication method which can be performed by a communication device, such as a terminal device.
  • the method includes: determining a modulation coding mode index; determining first information; determining, according to the first information, modulation coding mode information corresponding to the modulation coding mode index; wherein the determining the first information comprises: according to the received DCI Determining the first information, or the number of times the first HARQ response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, determining the first information, the first HARQ The response message is the first positive response message or the first negative response message.
  • the determining the first information includes: determining, according to the received DCI, the number of times the first HARQ response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, For information, the first HARQ response information is first acknowledgement information or first negative acknowledgement information.
  • the terminal device may determine the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index according to the first information, so that the terminal device may perform modulation or demodulation on the second information according to the determined modulation and coding mode information.
  • the first information may be dynamically notified to the terminal device, for example, determining the first information according to the DCI determining the first information, or the number of times the first HARQ response information is received, and the like, and determining the first information in a dynamic manner.
  • the terminal device may determine, according to the received DCI, or separately according to the number of times the first HARQ response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received. Or according to the received DCI and the number of times the first HARQ response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, the manner is flexible.
  • the first information is determined according to the received DCI, where the first information includes at least one of: a modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI; and a modulation and coding mode index indicated by the DCI.
  • the terminal device may determine the first information according to the received DCI, where the DCI may be used to schedule the second information, for example, the first information is determined by using the DCI, and the network device may additionally send other information to enable the terminal device to determine the first information. It helps to save transmission resources and improve resource utilization.
  • the first information includes a modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI
  • the modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI is at least one of a plurality of modulation and coding mode tables
  • the multiple The modulation and coding scheme table includes a first modulation and coding scheme table and a second modulation and coding scheme table
  • the modulation and coding scheme information corresponding to the modulation and coding scheme index included in the first modulation and coding scheme table is the first modulation and coding scheme information
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index included in the second modulation and coding scheme table is second modulation and coding scheme information.
  • the system may support at least one modulation coding mode table. If the number of modulation coding mode tables supported by the system is multiple, the modulation coding mode table indicated by the DCI is at least one of the multiple modulation coding mode tables.
  • a modulation coding mode table corresponds to a block error rate, and at least one modulation coding mode information is included in each modulation coding mode table supported by the system.
  • the first information may directly include a modulation coding mode table indicated by the DCI, and the terminal device may determine, according to the DCI, which modulation coding mode table should be used, and then combine the modulation coding mode index, and determine corresponding in the modulation coding mode table. Modulation of coding method information is relatively straightforward.
  • the first information includes a modulation and coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI
  • the modulation and coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI is a plurality of modulation and coding mode index offset values.
  • at least one of the plurality of modulation and coding mode index offset values includes a first modulation and coding mode index offset value and a second modulation and coding mode index offset value, where the first modulation and coding mode index offset value corresponds to
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index is the first modulation and coding mode information
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the second modulation and coding mode index offset value is the second modulation and coding. Way information.
  • the terminal device may determine the modulation and coding mode information in the modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI according to the modulation and coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI and the determined modulation and coding mode index. Specifically, the terminal device may add the modulation and coding mode index offset value (or subtract the modulation and coding mode index offset value) on the basis of the determined modulation and coding mode index, and obtain a modulation in the modulation and coding mode table.
  • the coding mode index, and the modulation coding mode information corresponding to the modulation coding mode index is the modulation coding mode information to be determined. This method is equally straightforward and achievable.
  • the first information includes a feedback time interval indicated by the DCI, where the feedback time interval is a second corresponding to the data sent from the second information to the terminal device.
  • the time interval between the HARQ response information, or the time interval between the DCI that schedules the second information and the second information is sent by the terminal device, where the feedback time interval indicated by the DCI belongs to multiple At least one of the time interval sets, the plurality of time interval sets includes a first time interval set and a second time interval set, and the first time interval set includes the modulation coding mode index corresponding to the feedback time interval
  • the corresponding modulation and coding mode information is the first modulation and coding mode information
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the feedback time interval included in the second time interval set is the second modulation and coding mode information.
  • the service may be the URLLC service, or other more urgent services.
  • the modulation coding information with a lower block error rate can be used.
  • the modulation and coding mode information with a higher block error rate can be used.
  • the first information includes a modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI and/or a modulation and coding mode index offset value indicated in the DCI, and further includes a format of the DCI.
  • the format of the DCI is a first DCI format
  • the DCI includes a first bit information field and a second bit information field
  • the determining the first information includes: determining, according to the first bit information field, that the DCI is indicated a modulation coding mode table and/or a modulation coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI, wherein the number of bits of the first bit information field is greater than or equal to 1, and the second bit information field includes the following one
  • the number of bits of the second bit information field is less than or equal to 2
  • the second bit information field is used to indicate a feedback time from the second information to the HARQ response information; the bits of the second bit information field
  • the second bit information field is used to indicate a time domain resource occupied by the second information; the number of bits of the second bit information field is
  • the format of the DCI may include a first DCI format and a second DCI format
  • the DCI of the first DCI format may be referred to as a compact DCI
  • the DCI of the second DCI format may be referred to as a fallback DCI.
  • the DCI of the first DCI format is a DCI applicable to the URLLC service.
  • the DCI of the second DCI format is a DCI applicable to all services, such as DCI format 0_0 and DCI format 1_0.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the DCI of the first DCI format.
  • the total number of bits of the DCI of the first DCI format and the total number of bits of the DCI of the second DCI format can be set to be the same, which can reduce the number of blind detections and save power for the terminal device.
  • the second bit information field can continue to complete the original function of the second bit information field, and the first bit information field can be used to determine the first information, which is equivalent to utilizing existing ones in the DCI.
  • the bit information field is used to complete the determination of the first information, and no additional resources are needed to determine the first information, which helps to save transmission resources and improves the utilization of DCI resources.
  • the first information includes an A-CSI indicated by the DCI
  • the A-CSI indicated by the DCI is at least one of multiple A-CSIs
  • the multiple A-CSIs The first CSI and the second CSI are included, and the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the first CSI is the first modulation and coding mode information, and the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the second CSI is corresponding to
  • the modulation coding mode information is second modulation coding mode information; and/or, the CSI included in the DCI indicated by the DCI corresponds to a plurality of error block rates, and the plurality of error block rates include a highest block error rate and a minimum a block error rate; the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation coding mode index corresponding to the highest block error rate is first modulation and coding mode information, and the modulation coding code corresponding to the modulation coding mode index corresponding to the lowest block error rate
  • the mode information is the second
  • the first CSI and the second CSI may be CSIs with different contents. For example, if the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes slowly changing information, such as RI and/or RSRP, indicating that the CSI may be a less urgent service, a block error is required. A higher rate modulation coding mode table. If the CSI included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes fast information, such as CQI and/or PMI, indicating that the CSI may be a more urgent service, a modulation coding mode table with a lower block error rate is required.
  • slowly changing information such as RI and/or RSRP
  • a block error is required.
  • a higher rate modulation coding mode table If the CSI included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes fast information, such as CQI and/or PMI, indicating that the CSI may be a more urgent service, a modulation coding mode table with a lower block error rate is required.
  • the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes the CSI part 2, indicating that the CSI may be a less urgent service, a modulation coding mode table with a higher block error rate is required. If the CSI included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes only CSI part 1, indicating that the CSI may be a more urgent service, a modulation coding mode table with a lower block error rate is required. It should be noted that the correspondence between the modulation coding mode table and the error block rate is not limited, that is, the corresponding manner of the block error rate and the modulation coding mode table may be pre-defined or high-level signaling configuration.
  • the first CSI and the second CSI may be CSIs having different bit information numbers (or number of bits), and then, for example, if the number of bit information included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI is greater than or equal to the first number of bits, indicating CSI It may be a less urgent service, and a modulation coding mode table with a higher block error rate is required. If the number of bit information included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI is smaller than the second bit number, indicating that the CSI may be a more urgent service, a modulation coding mode table with a lower block error rate is required.
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation coding mode index corresponding to the highest block error rate may be defined as the first modulation and coding mode information, and the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation coding mode index corresponding to the lowest error block rate is The second modulation and coding mode information, or the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the lowest block error rate is the first modulation and coding mode information, and the modulation corresponding to the modulation coding mode index corresponding to the highest error block rate
  • the coding mode information is the second modulation coding mode information, and the specific regulations are not limited.
  • the determining the first information comprises: determining, according to the number of times the first HARQ response information is received in a first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received.
  • First information the first information includes at least one of: a number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or a number of times the first HARQ response information is not received; The number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window; the number of times the first negative acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, a ratio between the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received within the first time window; and the number of times the first positive response message is received within the first time window, The ratio between the total number of times the first HARQ response message should be received within the first time window.
  • the first time window may be specified by a protocol, or may also be configured by a network device, and the terminal device is notified by high layer signaling or dynamic signaling.
  • the first time window is, for example, a unit time at which the time of receiving the DCI carrying the MCS information is the termination time, determining whether the time of the MCS information is the unit time of the termination time, or starting from the time of receiving the first acknowledgement information.
  • the time of the first first negative response information received after receiving the first acknowledgement information is the termination time, or the time when the first acknowledgement information is received is the start time, to receive the The moment when the first HARQ response information is not received for the first time after the first positive response message is the termination time, or the time when the first acknowledgement information is received is the start time, after receiving the first acknowledgement information
  • the end time of the preset duration is the end time.
  • the first positive response information here may be any one of the first positive response information during the transmission process, or the start time and the end time of the time unit.
  • the terminal device receives the first HARQ response information from the network device every time a data (or transport block) is sent, and the terminal device can receive the first HARQ response information according to the first time window. Determining the first information eliminates the need to use other additional information to determine the first information, and the network device does not need to send additional information, which helps to save transmission resources.
  • the first information includes the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received
  • the Receiving, by the time window, the number of times of the first negative response information and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received belongs to at least one of a plurality of sets of times, the plurality of sets of times including the first set of times
  • the first set of times includes a number of times of receiving the first negative response information in the first time window and/or a number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, corresponding to
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index is first modulation and coding mode information
  • the second time set includes the number of times and/or the first negative acknowledgement information received in the first time window.
  • the number of times the first HARQ response information is received, and the corresponding modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index is the
  • the network device Receiving the first negative acknowledgement message, indicating that the network device receives the error, or indicating that the uplink data transmission error of the terminal device, but not receiving the first negative acknowledgement message, which may also indicate that the network device receives the error, or may indicate the uplink data transmission of the terminal device. error. If the number of times the first negative response message is received and/or the first HARQ response message is not received, the network device always receives an error, because the time of the end of the service transmission is getting closer, for example, selecting a low block error rate. Modulation coding method table.
  • the first information includes a number of times the first positive response information is received in the first time window, and the number of times the first positive response information is received in the first time window Having at least one of a plurality of sets of times, the plurality of sets of times comprising a third set of times and a fourth set of times, the third set of times comprising receiving the first positive response within the first time window
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the number of times of information is the first modulation and coding mode information
  • the fourth time set includes the first acknowledgement information received in the first time window.
  • the modulation and coding scheme information corresponding to the modulation and coding scheme index corresponding to the number of times is the second modulation and coding scheme information.
  • Receiving the first positive response message indicating that the network device receives the correct, or indicates that the uplink data transmission of the terminal device is correct. If the number of times of receiving the first acknowledgement information is small, the network device always receives an error, and the time is longer than the end of the service transmission, for example, the modulation coding mode table corresponding to the low block error rate is selected.
  • the first information includes the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, a ratio between the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window, the number of times the first negative acknowledgement information is received in the first time window, and/or the first HARQ response is not received
  • the ratio of the number of times of information to the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received within the first time window belongs to at least one of the plurality of ratio sets, the plurality of ratio sets including the first ratio set And a second ratio set, the first ratio set including the number of times the first negative acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, a ratio between the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window, and the corresponding modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index is the first modulation and coding
  • the network device receives the error, or indicating that the uplink data transmission error of the terminal device, but not receiving the first negative acknowledgement message, which may also indicate that the network device receives the error, or may indicate the uplink data transmission of the terminal device. error. If the ratio of the number of times the first negative response information is received and/or the first HARQ response information is not received, and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window is large, the network device is illustrated The error is always received, because the time from the end of the service transmission is getting closer, for example, the modulation coding mode table corresponding to the low block error rate is selected.
  • the first information includes a number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window, and the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window.
  • the fourth ratio set includes a number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window, and the first HARQ should be received in the first time window
  • the ratio between the total number of times of the response information, and the corresponding modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index is the second modulation and coding mode information.
  • Receiving the first positive response message indicating that the network device receives the correct, or indicates that the uplink data transmission of the terminal device is correct. If the ratio of the number of times of receiving the first acknowledgement information to the total number of times the first HARQ response message should be received in the first time window is small, the network device always receives an error, because the time of the end of the service transmission is increasing. Recently, for example, a modulation coding mode table corresponding to a low block error rate is selected.
  • a communication method which can be performed by a communication device, such as a network device, such as a base station.
  • the method includes: determining modulation coding mode information; determining first information and a modulation coding mode index, where the first information and the modulation and coding mode index are used to indicate the modulation and coding mode information; and transmitting, by using downlink control information DCI First information.
  • the network device may send the first information by using the DCI, so that the terminal device can determine the first information by using the DCI, and the terminal device can determine the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index according to the first information, so that the terminal device can
  • the determined modulation and coding mode information is used to perform modulation or demodulation on the second information, and the first information may be notified to the terminal device in a dynamic manner, for example, determining the first information according to the DCI without using semi-static high-level signaling.
  • the manner of notifying the terminal device of the modulation and coding mode information can better adapt to the requirements of the URLLC service.
  • the network device may also determine the first manner by using a corresponding manner.
  • the information for example, the network device determines the first information according to the situation that the first HARQ response information is sent in the first time window. In this case, the network device may send the first information without using the DCI, thereby saving transmission resources.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: a modulation coding mode table; a modulation coding mode index offset value; a feedback time interval; and, A-CSI.
  • the first information includes the modulation and coding mode table
  • the modulation and coding mode table is at least one of a plurality of modulation and coding mode tables
  • the plurality of modulation and coding mode tables include a first modulation a coding mode table and a second modulation coding mode table, wherein the modulation coding mode information corresponding to the modulation coding mode index included in the first modulation coding mode table is first modulation coding mode information, and the second modulation coding mode table
  • the first information includes the modulation and coding mode index offset value
  • the modulation and coding mode index offset value is at least one of a plurality of modulation and coding mode index offset values
  • the multiple The modulation coding mode index offset value includes a first modulation coding mode index offset value and a second modulation coding mode index offset value
  • the modulation coding code index corresponding to the first modulation coding mode index value corresponds to the modulation coding
  • the mode information is the first modulation and coding mode information
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the second modulation and coding mode index value is the second modulation and coding mode information.
  • the first information includes the feedback time interval, where the feedback time interval is from sending data included in the second information to sending, by the terminal device, second HARQ response information corresponding to the data.
  • the plurality of time interval sets include a first time interval set and a second time interval set, where the modulation coding mode information corresponding to the modulation coding mode index corresponding to the feedback time interval included in the first time interval set is The modulation coding mode information corresponding to the modulation coding mode index corresponding to the feedback time interval included in the second time interval set is the second modulation coding mode information.
  • the first information includes the modulation and coding mode table and/or the modulation and coding mode index offset value, and further includes a format of the DCI, where the DCI format is a first DCI format.
  • the DCI includes a first bit information field and a second bit information field, where the first bit information field is used to indicate determining the modulation and coding mode table and/or the modulation and coding mode index offset value, where The number of bits of the first bit information field is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second bit information field includes one of the following: the number of bits of the second bit information field is less than or equal to 2, and the second bit information field is used.
  • the number of bits of the second bit information field is less than or equal to 3, and the second bit information field is used to indicate a time domain occupied by the second information.
  • a resource the number of bits of the second bit information field is equal to 1, the second bit information field is used to indicate a redundancy version, and the redundancy version is 0 or 3; the number of bits of the second bit information field Equal to 1, the second ratio
  • the special information field is used to indicate a transmit power command word of the terminal device, where the transmit power command word is 0 or 3; and, the number of bits in the second bit information field is equal to 4, and the second bit information field is used. Instructing the modulation coding mode index.
  • the first information includes the A-CSI
  • the A-CSI is at least one of a plurality of A-CSIs
  • the multiple A-CSIs include a first CSI and a second CSI
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the first CSI is the first modulation and coding mode information
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the second CSI is the second Modulating coding mode information
  • the CSI included in the A-CSI corresponds to a plurality of block error rates, the plurality of block error rates including a highest block error rate and a lowest block error rate; the highest block error rate corresponding to
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index is the first modulation and coding mode information
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the lowest error rate is the second modulation and coding mode information, or
  • the first information includes at least one of: a search space in which the DCI is located; a carrier in which the DCI is located; a detection period of the DCI; a CCE aggregation level of the DCI; The CORSET where the DCI is located.
  • the first information includes a search space where the DCI is located, and the search space where the DCI is located is at least one of a plurality of search spaces, where the multiple search spaces include a common search space and a user.
  • a dedicated search space where the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the common search space is the first modulation and coding mode information, and the modulation and coding mode corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the user-specific search space
  • the information is the first modulation coding mode information.
  • the frequency of occurrence of public search spaces is generally low, while the frequency of occurrence of user-specific search spaces is generally high. Therefore, the common search space is more suitable for modulation coding mode information with higher block error rate, and the user-specific search space is more suitable for modulation coding mode information with lower block error rate. From this point of view, the second modulation coding mode information corresponds to The block error rate may be smaller than the block error rate corresponding to the first modulation and coding mode information.
  • the first information includes a carrier where the DCI is located, and the carrier where the DCI is located is at least one of multiple carriers, where the multiple carriers include a first carrier and a second carrier, where
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the first carrier is the first modulation and coding mode information
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the second carrier is the second modulation and coding. Way information.
  • the system may transmit the URLLC service on a specific carrier and carry other services on other carriers. If the terminal device receives the DCI through the carrier that carries the URLLC service, it indicates that the second information scheduled by the DCI belongs to the URLLC. For the service, if the URLLC service requires high reliability, the modulation and coding mode information with a lower block error rate can be selected. If the terminal device receives the DCI through the carrier carrying other services, it indicates that the second information scheduled by the DCI belongs to For other services except the URLLC service, if the reliability requirements of other services are not as high as the URLLC service, the modulation and coding mode information with a higher block error rate can be selected.
  • the first information includes a detection period of the DCI
  • the detection period of the DCI belongs to at least one of a plurality of detection period sets, where the plurality of detection cycle sets includes a first detection cycle set and a first a second detection period set, where the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the first detection period set is the first modulation and coding mode information, and the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the second detection period set corresponds to
  • the modulation coding mode information is the second modulation coding mode information.
  • Such a service may be a URLLC service or other more urgent services.
  • a modulation coding information with a lower block error rate may be used. Guarantee reliability. If the detection period of the DCI is long, indicating that the demand is not very urgent, the reliability requirements of such a service are generally not very high, and for such a service, the modulation and coding mode information with a higher block error rate can be used.
  • the first information includes a CCE aggregation level of the DCI, and a CCE aggregation level of the DCI belongs to at least one of a plurality of aggregation level sets, where the multiple aggregation level sets include a first aggregation a level set and a second aggregation level set, where the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the first aggregation level set is first modulation and coding mode information, and the modulation corresponding to the second aggregation level set
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the coding mode index is the second modulation and coding mode information.
  • the probability that the terminal device can receive the DCI is higher, and then the reliability requirement of the terminal device is likely to be higher, and the modulation and coding mode information with a lower block error rate can be used to ensure reliability.
  • the terminal device may not receive the DCI. Therefore, the reliability requirement of the terminal device is not very high at this time, and the modulation and coding mode information with a higher block error rate may be used.
  • the first information includes a CORSET in which the DCI is located, and the CORSET in which the DCI is located belongs to at least one of a plurality of CORSET sets, the plurality of CORSET sets including a first CORSET set and a second
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation coding mode index corresponding to the first CORSET set is the first modulation coding mode information
  • the information is the second modulation coding mode information.
  • the corresponding REG binding size in the first CORSET set belongs to the first REG binding size set, and/or the corresponding REG binding size in the second CORSET set belongs to the second REG. Bind size collection.
  • the probability that the terminal device can receive the DCI is higher. Then, the reliability requirement of the terminal device is high, and the modulation and coding mode information with a lower block error rate can be used to ensure reliability.
  • the terminal device may not receive the DCI. Therefore, the reliability of the terminal device is not very high, and the modulation and coding mode information with a higher block error rate may be used.
  • the DCI is used to indicate a time domain resource and/or a frequency domain resource of the second information
  • the determining the first information includes: determining, according to the resource where the second information is located, the first The information includes: at least one of the following: a carrier where the resource where the second information is located; a cell where the resource where the second information is located; and a BWP where the resource where the second information is located; a TAG where the resource where the second information is located, a PUCCH group in which the resource where the second information is located, a PUCCH format corresponding to the resource where the second information is located, and a subcarrier spacing of the resource where the second information is located a waveform in which the resource where the second information is located; and a time domain length of the resource in which the second information is located.
  • the first information includes a carrier where the resource where the second information is located, and the carrier where the resource where the second information is located is at least one of multiple carriers, where the multiple carriers
  • the first carrier and the second carrier are included, and the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the first carrier is the first modulation and coding mode information, and the modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the second carrier is corresponding to
  • the modulation coding mode information is the second modulation coding mode information.
  • the system may transmit the URLLC service on a specific carrier and carry other services on other carriers. If the second information is transmitted through the carrier carrying the URLLC service, the second information belongs to the URLLC service and the URLLC service. If higher reliability is required, the modulation coding mode information with a lower block error rate may be selected, and if the second information is transmitted by the carrier carrying other services, the second information belongs to other services except the URLLC service, and the other information If the reliability of the service is not as high as that of the URLLC service, the modulation and coding mode information with a higher block error rate can be selected.
  • the first information includes the cell where the resource where the second information is located, the BWP where the resource where the second information is located, the TAG where the resource where the second information is located, the PUCCH group where the resource where the second information is located, and the second information
  • the PUCCH format corresponding to the resource the subcarrier spacing of the resource where the second information is located, and the waveform where the resource where the second information is located is similar to the carrier where the first information includes the resource where the second information is located, Not much to repeat.
  • the first information includes a time domain length of a resource in which the second information is located, and a time domain length of the resource in which the second information is located belongs to at least one of a plurality of time domain length sets.
  • the plurality of time domain length sets include a first time domain length set and a second time domain length set, where the first time domain length set includes a modulation and coding mode corresponding to a time domain length of the resource where the second information is located
  • the information is the first modulation and coding mode information, and the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the time domain length of the resource in which the second information is included in the second time domain length set is the second modulation and coding mode information.
  • the time domain of the resource where the second information is located is small, indicating that the second information may be a more urgent service, or the transmission time left to the second information is shorter, a modulation with a lower block rate is required.
  • Encoding mode information so as to ensure that the second information can be successfully transmitted in a short time, and in the case that the time domain of the resource where the second information is located is large, indicating that the second information may be a less urgent service.
  • the modulation and coding method information with a high error block rate can be used.
  • the block error rate corresponding to the second modulation and coding mode information is smaller than the block error rate corresponding to the first modulation and coding mode information; or the block error rate corresponding to the second modulation and coding mode information
  • the priority is higher than the priority of the block error rate corresponding to the first modulation and coding mode information.
  • the error block rate corresponding to the second modulation and coding mode information is greater than the error block rate corresponding to the first modulation and coding mode information; or the error corresponding to the second modulation and coding mode information
  • the priority of the block rate is lower than the priority of the block error rate corresponding to the first modulation and coding mode information.
  • the relationship between the block error rate corresponding to the first modulation and coding mode information and the block error rate corresponding to the second modulation and coding mode information is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second modulation and coding mode information is the same as the first modulation and coding mode information, or the second modulation and coding mode information is different from the first modulation and coding mode information.
  • a communication method which can be performed by a communication device, such as a terminal device.
  • a communication method which can be performed by a communication device, such as a network device, such as a base station.
  • the method includes: determining modulation coding mode information, the modulation coding mode information including a modulation mode, an encoding code rate, and a block error rate, wherein the error block rate is one of at least two block error rates, the at least two The block error rate includes the first block error rate and the second block error rate; determining a modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the modulation and coding mode information, where the modulation and coding mode index is one of N modulation and coding indexes,
  • the MCS table can be re-provided, and the terminal device can determine the MCS information directly in the MCS table by determining the MCS index, which is simple and easy to implement.
  • a communication device such as a terminal device.
  • the terminal device has the function of implementing the terminal device in the above method design. These functions can be implemented in hardware or in software by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the specific structure of the terminal device may include a processor and a transceiver.
  • the processor and transceiver may perform the respective functions of the methods provided by any of the possible aspects of the first aspect or the first aspect described above.
  • a communication device such as a network device.
  • the network device has the function of implementing the network device in the above method design. These functions can be implemented in hardware or in software by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the specific structure of the network device can include a processor and a transceiver.
  • the processor and transceiver may perform the respective functions of the methods provided by any of the possible aspects of the second aspect or the second aspect described above.
  • a communication device such as a terminal device.
  • the terminal device has the function of implementing the terminal device in the above method design. These functions can be implemented in hardware or in software by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the specific structure of the terminal device may include a processor and a transceiver.
  • the processor and transceiver may perform the respective functions of the methods provided by any of the possible aspects of the third or third aspect above.
  • a communication device such as a network device.
  • the network device has the function of implementing the network device in the above method design. These functions can be implemented in hardware or in software by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the specific structure of the network device can include a processor and a transceiver.
  • the processor and transceiver may perform the respective functions of the methods provided by any one of the possible aspects of the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect described above.
  • a communication device such as a terminal device.
  • the terminal device has the function of implementing the terminal device in the above method design. These functions can be implemented in hardware or in software by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the specific structure of the terminal device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module and the transceiver module may perform the respective functions of the methods provided by any of the possible aspects of the first aspect or the first aspect described above.
  • a communication device such as a network device.
  • the network device has the function of implementing the network device in the above method design. These functions can be implemented in hardware or in software by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the specific structure of the network device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module and the transceiver module may perform the respective functions of the methods provided by any of the possible aspects of the second aspect or the second aspect described above.
  • a communication device such as a terminal device.
  • the terminal device has the function of implementing the terminal device in the above method design. These functions can be implemented in hardware or in software by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the specific structure of the terminal device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module and the transceiver module may perform the respective functions of the methods provided by any of the possible aspects of the third aspect or the third aspect described above.
  • a communication device such as a network device.
  • the network device has the function of implementing the network device in the above method design. These functions can be implemented in hardware or in software by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the specific structure of the network device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module and the transceiver module may perform the respective functions of the methods provided by any of the possible designs of the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect described above.
  • a communication device may be a terminal device in the above method design, or a chip disposed in the terminal device.
  • the communication device includes a memory for storing computer executable program code, and a processor coupled to the memory.
  • the program code stored in the memory includes instructions which, when executed by the processor, cause the communication device to perform the method performed by the terminal device in any of the possible aspects of the first aspect or the first aspect described above.
  • a communication device may be a network device in the above method design, or a chip disposed in the network device.
  • the communication device includes a memory for storing computer executable program code, and a processor coupled to the memory.
  • the program code stored in the memory includes instructions which, when executed by the processor, cause the communication device to perform the method performed by the network device in any of the possible aspects of the second aspect or the second aspect above.
  • a communication device may be a terminal device in the above method design, or a chip disposed in the terminal device.
  • the communication device includes a memory for storing computer executable program code, and a processor coupled to the memory.
  • the program code stored in the memory includes instructions which, when executed by the processor, cause the communication device to perform the method performed by the terminal device in any of the possible aspects of the third aspect or the third aspect above.
  • a communication device may be a network device in the above method design, or a chip disposed in the network device.
  • the communication device includes a memory for storing computer executable program code, and a processor coupled to the memory.
  • the program code stored in the memory includes instructions which, when executed by the processor, cause the communication device to perform the method performed by the network device in any one of the possible aspects of the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect described above.
  • a communication system comprising a network device and a terminal device.
  • the terminal device is configured to determine a modulation and coding mode index, determine the first information, and determine the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index according to the first information, where the determining the first information includes: Determining, by the received DCI, or the number of times the first HARQ response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, determining the first information, where the first HARQ response information is a first acknowledgement information or first negative acknowledgement information; a network device, configured to determine modulation and coding mode information; determine first information and a modulation and coding mode index, where the first information and the modulation and coding mode index are used to indicate the Modulating coding mode information; transmitting the first information by using downlink control information DCI.
  • a communication system comprising a network device and a terminal device.
  • the terminal device is configured to determine a modulation coding mode index, where the modulation coding mode index is one of N modulation coding indexes, and the N modulation coding mode indexes are from 0 to N-1, and the N modulations
  • the A, B, and C are integers
  • the X, Y, and Z are integers.
  • a computer storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform any one of the first aspect or the first aspect of the first aspect The method described in the above.
  • a computer storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform any of the possible aspects of the second aspect or the second aspect described above The method described in the above.
  • a computer storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform any one of the third aspect or the third aspect described above The method described in the design.
  • a twenty-second aspect a computer storage medium is provided, wherein the computer readable storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform any one of the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect described above The method described in the design.
  • a twenty-third aspect a computer program product comprising instructions, wherein the computer program product stores instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform any of the first aspect or the first aspect described above The method described in the design.
  • a twenty-fourth aspect a computer program product comprising instructions, wherein the computer program product stores instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform any of the second aspect or the second aspect described above The method described in the design.
  • a twenty-fifth aspect a computer program product comprising instructions, wherein instructions stored in a computer program product, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform any one of the third aspect or the third aspect described above The method described in the design.
  • a twenty-sixth aspect a computer program product comprising instructions, wherein instructions stored in a computer program product, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform any one of the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect described above The method described in the design.
  • the first information may be notified to the terminal device in a dynamic manner, for example, determining the first information according to the first information of the DCI or the number of times of receiving the first HARQ response information, and the like, and adopting a dynamic manner.
  • the first information is determined without being notified by means of semi-static high-level signaling, so that the requirement of the URLLC service can be satisfied, so that the manner of notifying the terminal device of the modulation and coding mode information can better adapt to the requirement of the URLLC service.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a first communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of time requirements of a URLLC service transmission process in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 9A-9B are two schematic structural diagrams of a communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • a terminal device including a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, for example, may include a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the terminal device can communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN) to exchange voice and/or data with the RAN.
  • the terminal device may include a user equipment (UE), a wireless terminal device, a mobile terminal device, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, and a remote station.
  • Remote station access point (AP), remote terminal, access terminal, user terminal, user agent, or user Equipment (user device) and so on.
  • a mobile phone or "cellular" phone
  • a computer with a mobile terminal device a portable, pocket, handheld, computer built-in or in-vehicle mobile device, smart wearable device, and the like.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • restricted devices such as devices with lower power consumption, or devices with limited storage capacity, or devices with limited computing capabilities. Examples include information sensing devices such as bar code, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), and laser scanners.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • GPS global positioning system
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • a wearable device which can also be called a wearable smart device, is a general term for applying wearable technology to intelligently design and wear wearable devices such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are more than just a hardware device, but they also implement powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • Generalized wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-size, non-reliable smartphones for full or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and focus on only one type of application, and need to work with other devices such as smartphones. Use, such as various types of smart bracelets for smart signs monitoring, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc.
  • a network device for example comprising a base station (e.g., an access point), may refer to a device in the access network that communicates over the air interface with the wireless terminal device over one or more cells.
  • the network device can be used to convert the received air frame to an Internet Protocol (IP) packet as a router between the terminal device and the rest of the access network, wherein the remainder of the access network can include an IP network.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • Network devices can also coordinate attribute management of air interfaces.
  • the network device may include an evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in a long term evolution (LTE) system or an evolved LTE system (LTE-A), or
  • the next generation node B (gNB) in the 5G NR system may also be included in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device provides a service for the cell
  • the terminal device communicates with the network device by using a transmission resource (for example, a frequency domain resource, or a spectrum resource) used by the cell
  • a transmission resource for example, a frequency domain resource, or a spectrum resource
  • the cell may be a network device.
  • the cell may belong to a macro base station, or may belong to a base station corresponding to a small cell, where the small cell may include: a metro cell, a micro cell, and a pico cell. (Pico cell), femto cell, etc.
  • These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
  • multiple carriers can work at the same frequency on the carrier in the LTE system or the NR system.
  • the concept of the carrier and the cell can be considered to be equivalent.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the concept of the carrier and the cell can be considered to be equivalent, for example, the UE accessing one carrier and accessing one cell are equivalent.
  • Subcarrier spacing the interval value between the center position or the peak position of two adjacent subcarriers in the frequency domain in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) system.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • the subcarrier spacing in a long term evolution (LTE) system is 15 (kilohertz, kHz)
  • the subcarrier spacing of a 5G NR system may be 15 kHz, or 30 kHz, or 60 kHz, or 120 kHz, and the like.
  • the URLLC service requires a very high latency for the URLLC service.
  • the one-way transmission delay from the sender to the receiver is within 0.5 ms, and the transmission reliability is 99.999% within 1 ms.
  • the data transmission of the wireless air interface can use a shorter time scheduling unit, for example, using a mini-slot, or using a larger sub-carrier time slot as the smallest.
  • Time scheduling unit includes one or more time domain symbols, where the time domain symbols may be orthogonal frequency division multiplexing OFDM symbols.
  • the corresponding time length is 0.5 ms; for a time slot with a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz, the corresponding time length is shortened to 0.125 ms.
  • the generation of data packets of the URLLC service is bursty and random, and may not generate data packets for a long period of time, or may generate multiple data packets in a short time.
  • the packets of the URLLC service are in most cases small packets, for example 50 bytes.
  • the characteristics of the data packets of the URLLC service affect the way resources are allocated by the communication system.
  • the resources herein include but are not limited to: time domain symbols, frequency domain resources, time-frequency resources, codeword resources, and beam resources.
  • the allocation of system resources is performed by the access network device. The following uses the access network device as an example for description. If the access network device allocates resources for the URLLC service by using reserved resources, the system resources are wasted when there is no URLLC service. Moreover, the short delay feature of the URLLC service requires the data packet to be transmitted in a very short period of time. Therefore, the access network device needs to reserve a sufficient bandwidth for the URLLC service, thereby causing a serious drop in system resource utilization.
  • the URLLC service data usually adopts a shorter time scheduling unit to meet the requirements of ultra-short delay, for example, two time domain symbols with 15 kHz subcarrier spacing, or one time slot with 60 kHz subcarrier spacing, corresponding to seven time slots.
  • the domain symbol, the corresponding length of time is 0.125ms.
  • Modulation coding mode table In this paper, the modulation coding mode may be simply referred to as MCS. In this paper, the modulation coding mode table may be simply referred to as an MCS table. However, this article does not limit the modulation and coding methods will have other translation methods.
  • the MCS table includes at least one of the following contents: modulation, coding rate, and BLER. At least one modulation coding mode information may be included in an MCS table, and each modulation coding mode information has a corresponding index (ie, a modulation coding mode index), and corresponding to at least one of the following contents: modulation mode, coding rate, and BLER .
  • the modulation and coding scheme information may be simply referred to as MCS information
  • the modulation and coding scheme index may be simply referred to as the MCS index.
  • MCS tables may be supported, each of which may correspond to one BLER or multiple BLERs.
  • MCS tables may be supported, each of which may correspond to one BLER or multiple BLERs.
  • the introduction process of this article mainly take two MCS tables as an example. In practical applications, the number of MCS tables is not limited to this.
  • CSI Channel state information
  • P-CSI periodic CSI
  • A-CSI aperiodic CSI
  • SPS-CSI semi-persistent CSI
  • each trigger depends on the transmission of the DCI.
  • reducing the control channel resources occupied by the DCI introduces semi-persistent CSI, and the periodic CSI is configured by the higher layer signaling, so the most DCI transmission is saved, and thus three types. The mechanism has been retained.
  • 4G fourth generation mobile communication system
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • the periodic CSI must be sent in a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
  • the CSI includes a channel quality indicator (CQI), a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a rank indicator (RI), a reference signal receiving power (RSRP), and a channel.
  • CQI channel quality indicator
  • PMI precoding matrix indicator
  • RI rank indicator
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • CRI channel quality indicator
  • CRI channel-state information reference signal resource indicator
  • CRI indicator of the number of non-zero wide band amplitude coefficients
  • Bandwidth part refers to a part of the channel bandwidth. It can also be called “operating bandwidth” or transmission bandwidth, mini BWP (mini BWP), BWP unit (BWP Unit), and BP sub-band.
  • the band and the like may be simply referred to as BWP, and may also be simply referred to as BP.
  • the name of the bandwidth portion and the abbreviation are not specifically limited.
  • the BWP can be a contiguous resource in the frequency domain.
  • one bandwidth portion includes consecutive K (K>0) subcarriers; or one bandwidth portion is N (N>0) frequency domain resources in which non-overlapping consecutive resource blocks (RBs) are located; or A bandwidth part is a frequency domain resource in which M (M>0) non-overlapping consecutive resource block groups (RBGs) are located, and one RBG includes P (P>0) consecutive RBs.
  • a bandwidth portion is associated with a particular system parameter including at least one of a subcarrier spacing and a cyclic prefix (CP).
  • the block error rate referred to as BLER in this article, does not exclude other translation methods or other names.
  • BLER is the percentage of blocks that are erroneous in all blocks sent.
  • the BLER can be equal to ⁇ x*10e-1, x*10e-2, x*10e-3, x*10e-4, x*10e-5, x*10e-6, x*10e-7, x* One of 10e-8, x*10e-9 ⁇ , or it can be equal to other values.
  • the BLER can also be replaced with a correct rate, which can be equal to ⁇ 1-x*1e-1, 1-x*1e-2, 1-x*1e-3, 1-x*1e-4,1.
  • a correct rate can be equal to ⁇ 1-x*1e-1, 1-x*1e-2, 1-x*1e-3, 1-x*1e-4,1.
  • High-level signaling which may refer to signaling sent by a higher layer protocol layer
  • the upper layer protocol layer is at least one protocol layer above the physical layer.
  • the upper layer protocol layer may specifically include at least one of the following protocol layers: a medium access control (MAC) layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, and a packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence). Protocol, PDCP) layer, radio resource control (RRC) layer and non access stratum (NAS).
  • MAC medium access control
  • RLC radio link control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RRC radio resource control
  • NAS non access stratum
  • Dynamic signaling may refer to signaling sent by the physical layer, such as signaling or information sent through DCI.
  • this article will refer to the waveform of the DCI, or the waveform of the resource where the second information is located.
  • the 5G NR system supports two waveforms in the uplink, one is OFDM, the other is single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA), and the 5G NR system supports OFDM.
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • Timing advance group may include one carrier or multiple carriers, or include one BWP or multiple BWPs.
  • one PUCCH group may include one TAG or multiple TAGs, and may also include one carrier or multiple carriers.
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably.
  • Multiple means two or more.
  • a plurality can also be understood as “at least two” in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the character "/” unless otherwise specified, generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be applied to an LTE system or a 5G NR system, and can also be applied to a next generation mobile communication system or other similar communication system.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is applied to the URL LC service as an example, and is not limited to the actual application.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to other technologies.
  • FIG. 1 is an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • a network device and at least one terminal device are included, the network device and the terminal device operating in a 5G NR system, such as a base station.
  • the terminal device and the network device can communicate through the 5G NR system.
  • first MCS information and second MCS information are involved.
  • the first MCS information and the second MCS information may satisfy:
  • the BLER corresponding to the second MCS information is smaller than the BLER corresponding to the first MCS information, for example, the BLER corresponding to the second MCS information is 10e-5, and the BLER corresponding to the first MCS is 10e-3; or
  • the priority of the BLER corresponding to the second MCS information is higher than the priority of the BLER corresponding to the first MCS information.
  • the first MCS information and the second MCS information may satisfy:
  • the BLER corresponding to the second MCS information is greater than the BLER corresponding to the first MCS information, for example, the BLER corresponding to the first MCS information is 10e-5, and the BLER corresponding to the second MCS is 10e-3; or
  • the priority of the BLER corresponding to the second MCS information is lower than the priority of the BLER corresponding to the first MCS information.
  • the BLER corresponding to the second MCS information is smaller than the BLER corresponding to the first MCS information, or the priority of the BLER corresponding to the second MCS information is higher than the priority of the BLER corresponding to the first MCS information.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the size relationship between the BLER corresponding to the first MCS information and the BLER corresponding to the second MCS information, and does not limit the BLER priority corresponding to the first MCS information and the BLER corresponding to the second MCS information. The relationship between the priorities.
  • this paper does not limit the relationship between the value of BLER and the priority of BLER.
  • a possibility is that the smaller the BLER value is, the higher the priority is.
  • the BLER with a value of 10e-5 has a higher priority than the BLER with a value of 10e-3, or another possibility. If the priority of the BLER is larger, the priority of the BLER with the value of 10e-3 is higher than the priority of the BLER with the value of 10e-5.
  • the priority of the BLER is signaled by the network device through high layer signaling or physical layer signaling.
  • the first communication method is provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the application scenario shown in FIG. 1 is applied to the example.
  • the flow of this method is described below.
  • the terminal device sends the CSI to the network device, where the network device receives the CSI from the terminal device.
  • the network device determines the first information, or determines the first information and the modulation and coding mode index.
  • the network device sends a modulation and coding mode index to the terminal device, where the terminal device receives the modulation and coding mode index.
  • the terminal device determines a modulation and coding mode index.
  • the terminal device determines first information, where determining the first information comprises: determining first information according to the received DCI, and/or, according to the number of times the first HARQ response information is received in the first time window, and/or not receiving. The number of times of the first HARQ response information determines the first information, where the first HARQ response information is the first acknowledgement information or the first negative acknowledgement information;
  • the terminal device determines, according to the first information, modulation coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index.
  • the terminal device transmits the second information according to the determined modulation and coding mode information.
  • the number before the step is only an example, and is not a limitation on the actual execution order of the steps.
  • each step may also change the execution order according to different scenarios or requirements.
  • the terminal device obtains a CSI report by using a channel measurement of the CSI reference resource, and the terminal device sends the CSI obtained by encoding the CSI report to the network device, and the network device can receive the CSI from the terminal device.
  • the S21 is an optional step, because the network device may also send a modulation coding mode index or schedule the second information to the terminal device without receiving the CSI from the terminal device.
  • the network device may send an MCS index to the terminal device, and the network device may determine the first information and the MCS index in S22.
  • the network device may indicate, by using the DCI, the MCS index to the terminal device. Then, the terminal device can determine the MCS index according to the received DCI.
  • S22 can also be understood that the network device sends the DCI to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the DCI, and the DCI can indicate the MCS index.
  • the MCS field is included in the DCI, and the MCS field can indicate the MCS index.
  • the MCS index may also be pre-configured by the protocol, and the terminal device and the network device may directly determine.
  • the network device may choose to determine the MCS index in S22, or may determine the MCS index at any other step location.
  • the MCS index may be configured by the network device through other signaling such as higher layer signaling, and then S23 may be understood as: the network device sends other signaling such as high layer signaling to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the high layer signaling, etc.
  • Other signaling, other signaling such as higher layer signaling may indicate the MCS index, and in this case, S23 is not necessarily located at the current location, and may also occur at any step position before S26.
  • S22 is also an optional step because the terminal device can determine the MCS index and the first information even if the network device does not transmit the MCS index.
  • S26 is also an optional step because the terminal device does not necessarily transmit the second information.
  • the arrows used to represent the optional steps are drawn as dashed lines to distinguish them from other steps.
  • the second information may be uplink information or downlink information, it is represented by a double-headed arrow in FIG. 2, that is, the two-way arrow does not mean that both the terminal device and the network device send the first information, but only indicates the second information.
  • the information may be sent by the terminal device or by the network device.
  • the terminal device here transmits the second information, and specifically, the terminal device sends the second information or the terminal device receives the second information.
  • the network device may directly schedule the second information for the terminal device or the terminal directly sends the second information, and if the network device receives the CSI from the terminal device, the network device may The terminal device schedules the second information. It can be seen that the more timely the terminal device sends the CSI to the network device, the network device can allocate resources and the MCS selection for the terminal device to be more precise, thereby improving the use efficiency of the system resources and improving the accuracy of transmitting the second information by the terminal device.
  • the DCI may be used to schedule second information, for example, the DCI may indicate a time domain resource and/or a frequency domain resource for transmitting the second information.
  • the second information includes data and/or control information, which includes, for example, CSI, and may also include other information.
  • the second information may be carried by the PUSCH, or by a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), or a PUCCH bearer.
  • the second information may be uplink data and/or uplink control information carried in the PUSCH.
  • the second information may be downlink data and/or downlink control information carried in the PDSCH, or the second information may be uplink control information carried in the PUCCH.
  • the DCI may not be used for scheduling, for example, the DCI may be dedicated to indicating the first information.
  • the terminal device determines the first information, and may have different determining manners. For example, the terminal device determines the first information, including but not limited to at least one of the following manners:
  • the information is the first positive response message or the first negative response message.
  • the terminal device determines the first information according to the received DCI.
  • the first information determined by the terminal device may include a plurality of different information.
  • the first information determined by the terminal device includes at least one of the following:
  • modulation coding mode table indicated by the DCI, where the modulation coding mode table is at least one of a plurality of modulation coding mode tables;
  • the bandwidth part (BWP) where the DCI is located
  • the PUCCH group in which the DCI is located is located;
  • the feedback time interval is a time interval between sending data included in the second information and transmitting, by the terminal device, second HARQ response information corresponding to the data, Or a time interval between the sending of the second information from the DCI scheduling the second information to the terminal device;
  • control channel element (CCE) aggregation level of the DCI
  • the control resource group (CORSET) where the DCI is located.
  • the terminal device determines the first information according to the received DCI, because the network device determines the first information and then sends the DCI, the network device directly determines the first information, or determines the first information according to the DCI to be sent.
  • the first information determined by the network device includes at least one of the following:
  • the modulation coding mode table being at least one of a plurality of modulation coding mode tables
  • the PUCCH group in which the DCI is located is located;
  • the feedback time interval is a time interval between sending data included in the second information to sending the second HARQ response information corresponding to the data by the terminal device, or Determining a time interval between the DCI of the second information and the sending, by the terminal device, the second information;
  • the CCE aggregation level of the DCI The CCE aggregation level of the DCI.
  • the first information determined by the terminal device and the first information determined by the network device should be the same. For example, both the terminal device and the network device determine that the first information includes the carrier where the DCI is located.
  • the first information is introduced from the perspective of the terminal device, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is determined according to the first information.
  • the process of determining the first information, or the determined The content of a message is similar.
  • the first information includes a modulation coding mode table indicated by the DCI.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining, according to the received DCI, the MCS table indicated by the DCI, so as to determine MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the MCS table indicated by the DCI.
  • one or more MCS tables may be supported, possibly one MCS table corresponds to one BLER, or one MCS table corresponds to multiple BLERs.
  • MCS table corresponds to one BLER
  • MCS table corresponds to multiple BLERs.
  • at least one type of MCS information is included, and each MCS information has its corresponding MCS index.
  • the terminal device may determine the MCS index according to the MCS domain of the received DCI, or determine the MCS index according to a protocol or higher layer signaling or the like.
  • the MCS field of the DCI is a uniform number of bits, the same meaning is represented by the MCS index (0 to Y). Therefore, the MCS indexes in multiple MCS tables are numbered separately. Then, the MCS indexes in different MCS tables may be the same. For example, MCS table 1 has MCS index 1 and MCS table 2 also has MCS index 1. Therefore, in addition to obtaining the MCS index, the terminal device needs to determine which MCS table is used, so that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index can be uniquely determined.
  • the MCS table indicated by the DCI is a first MCS table, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index in the first MCS table is the first MCS information, or the MCS table indicated by the DCI is the second MCS table.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index in the two MCS tables is the second MCS information.
  • the MCS table indicated by the DCI is the first MCS table, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index in the first MCS table is the first MCS information, or the MCS table indicated by the DCI is the first
  • the second MCS table determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index in the second MCS table is the second MCS information.
  • the MCS table indicated by the DCI is at least one of a plurality of MCS tables, and the plurality of MCS tables include the first MCS table and the second MCS table, and then, in the perspective of describing the MCS table, the implementation manner of the A1
  • the scheme is described as: the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index included in the first MCS table is the first MCS information, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index included in the second MCS table is the second MCS information, where the first The MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the DCI may indicate the MCS table, and the terminal device may determine the MCS table according to the DCI, so that the MCS information may be determined. If the DCI also indicates the MCS index, the terminal device does not need to receive more information.
  • the MCS information can be determined, the occupation of the transmission resources is reduced, and the indication manner is relatively simple.
  • the first information includes a modulation and coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the modulation and coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, an MCS index, and determining, according to the received DCI, an MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI, thereby determining, according to an MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI, the MCS index corresponding to MCS information.
  • the modulation and coding mode index offset value may also be simply referred to as the MCS index offset value.
  • the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is at least one of a plurality of MCS index offset values, and the multiple MCS index offset values include a first MCS index offset value and a second MCS index offset value.
  • the system can support one or more MCS tables, possibly one MCS table corresponding to one BLER, or one MCS table corresponding to multiple BLERs.
  • MCS tables possibly one MCS table corresponding to one BLER, or one MCS table corresponding to multiple BLERs.
  • each of the plurality of MCS tables at least one type of MCS information is included, and each MCS information has its corresponding MCS index.
  • the system supports an MCS table corresponding to one BLER or multiple BLERs, in which the MCS indexes may be sequentially numbered.
  • the DCI may indicate the MCS index offset value
  • the terminal device may determine the MCS information in the MCS table indicated by the DCI according to the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI and the determined MCS index.
  • the terminal device may add the MCS index offset value (or subtract the MCS index offset value) to the determined MCS index to obtain an MCS index in the MCS table, and the MCS index corresponds to
  • the MCS information is the MCS information to be determined.
  • the MCS index number is 0 to 31, and the terminal device, for example, according to the configuration of the high layer signaling or the MCS index determined by the MCS field in the DCI is 2, and the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is 16, the terminal device
  • the MCS index 18 can be determined in the MCS table, and the MCS information indicated by the MCS index 18 is the MCS information to be determined by the terminal device.
  • the total MCS index number is 0 to 31, and the terminal device, for example, according to the configuration of the high layer signaling or the MCS index determined by the MCS field in the DCI is 2, and the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is -16.
  • the system supports multiple MCS tables, where each MCS table may correspond to one BLER or multiple BLERs.
  • the MCS indexes may be uniformly numbered, for example, in the first MCS table.
  • the MCS index includes the MCS index 0 to the MCS index 15
  • the second MCS table includes 16 MCS information
  • the corresponding MCS index is the MCS index 16 to the MCS index 31, and so on.
  • the DCI may indicate the MCS index offset value
  • the terminal device may determine which MCS information in the MCS table is indicated by the DCI according to the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI and the determined MCS index.
  • the terminal device may add the MCS index offset value to the determined MCS index to obtain an MCS index in one of the MCS tables, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the MCS information to be determined.
  • the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is the first index offset value
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is the second MCS information.
  • the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is the first index offset value
  • the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI.
  • the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the first index offset value of the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the second index offset value is the second MCS information.
  • the MCS index corresponding to the 16 MCS information included in the first MCS table is the MCS index 0 to the MCS index 15
  • the MCS index corresponding to the 16 MCS information included in the second MCS table is the MCS index. 16 to MCS index 31.
  • the MCS index determined by the terminal device is 2 according to the indication of the DCI
  • the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is 16
  • the terminal device can obtain the MCS index 18, and the MCS information indicated by the MCS index 18 is the MCS to be determined by the terminal device. information.
  • the terminal device determines, for example, that the MCS index is 2 according to the indication of the DCI, and the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is 0, the terminal device can obtain the MCS index 0, and the MCS information indicated by the MCS index 0 is determined by the terminal device. MCS information.
  • the MCS index 18 is located in the second MCS table, and the MCS index 0 is located in the first MCS table. Therefore, the MCS index offset value can also be considered to be used to indicate a specific MCS table.
  • the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is at least one of a plurality of MCS index offset values, where the multiple MCS index offset values include a first MCS index offset value and a second MCS index offset value, then
  • the scenario in which the MCS index offset value is described is also described as the first MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first MCS index offset value, and the second MCS index is biased.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the value shift is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first MCS index offset value is the first MCS information, and it should be understood that the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is the first MCS index offset value.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information. Regardless of whether the MCS index offset value indicated by the DCI is the first MCS index offset value or the second MCS index offset value, the MCS index is unchanged, therefore, the emphasis should be on the MCS index offset value and the MCS. Instead of emphasizing the correspondence between the MCS index offset value and the MCS index, the correspondence between the information is emphasized. For the above, the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second MCS index offset value is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the indication manner is relatively simple and straightforward, and is easy to implement.
  • the first information includes the search space where the DCI is located.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the search space where the DCI is located.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining, according to the received DCI, the search space where the DCI is located, so as to determine the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the search space where the DCI is located.
  • the search space configured by the network device for the terminal device includes a common search space (CSS) and a user-specific search space
  • the user-specific search space is, for example, a UE-specific search space (USS).
  • the search space indicated by the DCI is at least one of a plurality of search spaces, and the plurality of search spaces include a common search space and a user-specific search space.
  • the search space where the DCI is located is a common search space (or the terminal device is the DCI received from the public search space), and the terminal device may determine that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, and if The search space in which the DCI is located is a user-specific search space (or is understood to be that the terminal device receives the DCI from the user-specific search space), and the terminal device may determine that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the search space where the DCI is located is a user-specific search space, and the MCS corresponding to the MCS index The information is the second MCS information.
  • the search space indicated by the DCI is at least one of a plurality of search spaces, and the plurality of search spaces include a common search space and a user-specific search space.
  • the solution of the implementation manner A3 may also be adopted.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the common search space is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the user-specific search space is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information and the first The second MCS information is different.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the common search space is the first MCS information, and it should be understood that when the search space indicated by the DCI is a common search space, the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is First MCS information. Regardless of whether the search space indicated by the DCI is a common search space or a user-specific search space, the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the search space and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing the search space and Correspondence between the MCS indexes. For the above, the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the user-specific search space is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the frequency of occurrence of the common search space is generally low, and the frequency of occurrence of the user-specific search space is generally high. Therefore, the common search space is more suitable for the MCS information with higher BLER, and the user-specific search space is more suitable for the MCS information with lower BLER. From this perspective, the BLER corresponding to the second MCS information may be smaller than the BLER corresponding to the first MCS information. .
  • the DCI in the present application may be the DCI for scheduling the second information, or the DCI indicating the MCS index, or other DCI, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first information includes a carrier where the DCI is located.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the carrier where the DCI is located.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining, according to the received DCI, the carrier where the DCI is located, so as to determine the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the carrier where the DCI is located.
  • the carrier where the DCI is located is at least one of a plurality of carriers, and the multiple carriers include a first carrier and a second carrier.
  • the carrier where the DCI is located is the first carrier
  • the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the carrier where the DCI is located is the second carrier
  • the terminal device determines that the MCS index corresponds to The MCS information is the second MCS information.
  • the carrier of the DCI is the first carrier
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the carrier where the DCI is located is the second carrier
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS. information.
  • the system may transmit the URLLC service on a specific carrier and carry other services on other carriers. If the terminal device receives the DCI through the carrier that carries the URLLC service, it indicates that the second information scheduled by the DCI belongs to the URLLC. For the service, if the URLLC service requires high reliability, the lower MCS information of the BLER can be selected. If the terminal device receives the DCI through the carrier carrying other services, it indicates that the second information scheduled by the DCI belongs to the URLLC service. For other services, if the reliability requirements of other services are not as high as the URLLC service, the MCS information with higher BLER can be selected.
  • the carrier where the DCI is located is the primary carrier, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information.
  • the carrier where the DCI is located is the secondary carrier, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the first carrier is a carrier that carries other services than the URLLC service.
  • the system supports multiple MCS tables to support two MCS tables.
  • the terminal device can determine the BLER high according to the first carrier.
  • the MCS table for example, the first MCS table is selected, and in combination with the MCS index, the terminal device can determine which MCS information in the first MCS table is selected, for example, the first MCS information is selected.
  • the second carrier is a carrier carrying the URLLC service, and the system continues to support the two MCS tables.
  • the terminal device can determine, according to the second carrier, the MCS table with a low BLER, for example, the second MCS table is selected.
  • the terminal device can determine which MCS information in the second MCS table is selected, for example, the second MCS information is selected.
  • the primary carrier corresponding MCS table is a first MCS table, and then the first MCS information is determined.
  • the MCS corresponding to the secondary carrier is a second MCS table, and then the second MCS information is determined.
  • the correspondence between the carrier and the MCS information may be system pre-defined or higher layer signaling or physical layer signaling.
  • the carrier where the DCI is located is at least one of the multiple carriers, and the multiple carriers include the first carrier and the second carrier.
  • the station describes the scheme of Embodiment A4 as: the first carrier.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the corresponding MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second carrier is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first carrier is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first when the carrier where the DCI is located is the first carrier.
  • MCS information Regardless of whether the carrier in which the DCI is located is the first carrier or the second carrier, the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the carrier and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing the carrier and the MCS index. Correspondence between them.
  • the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second carrier is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the first information may further include: a cell where the DCI is located, a BWP where the DCI is located, a TAG where the DCI is located, a PUCCH group where the DCI is located, a subcarrier spacing of the DCI, and the At least one of the waveforms of the DCI is similar to the case where the first information includes the carrier in which the DCI is located, and therefore is placed next to Embodiment A4 and introduced.
  • the system or protocol may be pre-defined or high-level signaling or physical layer signaling, and the cell in which the DCI is located is a first cell, for example, a macro cell, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information.
  • the cell in which the DCI is located is a second cell, for example, a micro cell, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the system or protocol may pre-specify or high-level signaling or physical layer signaling, some cells correspond to MCS tables with high block error rate, and some cells correspond to MCS tables with low block error rates, for example, A cell corresponds to a MCS table of high block error rate, and the first cell corresponds to an MCS table of low block error rate. Then, the cell in which the DCI is located is the first cell, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the carrier where the DCI is located is the second cell, and the terminal device determines the corresponding MCS index.
  • the MCS information is the second MCS information.
  • the cell in which the DCI is located is the first cell
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the cell in which the DCI is located is the second cell
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS. information.
  • the cell in which the DCI is located is at least one of the multiple cells, and the multiple cells include the first cell and the second cell.
  • the station describes the scenario as the first cell.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second cell is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first cell is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first when the cell where the DCI is located is the first cell.
  • MCS information Regardless of whether the cell in which the DCI is located is the first cell or the second cell, the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the cell and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing the cell and the MCS index. Correspondence between them.
  • the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second cell is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the system or protocol may be pre-defined or high-level signaling or physical layer signaling, and the BWP in which the DCI is located is a first BWP, such as an initial BWP or a default BWP, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information.
  • the BWP in which the DCI is located is the second BWP, for example, the BWP is activated, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the BWP where the DCI is located is at least one of the plurality of BWPs, and the plurality of BWPs include the first BWP and the second BWP.
  • the scheme may also be described as: the corresponding location of the first BWP.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second BWP is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first BWP is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first when the BWP where the DCI is located is the first BWP.
  • MCS information is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the BWP and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing the BWP and the MCS index. Correspondence between them.
  • the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second BWP is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the first information includes the TAG where the DCI is located as an example.
  • the system or the protocol may be pre-defined or the higher layer signaling or the physical layer signaling
  • the TAG where the DCI is located is the first TAG, for example, the primary TAG
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information.
  • the TAG where the DCI is located is the second TAG, for example, the secondary TAG
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the TAG where the DCI is located is at least one of the multiple TAGs, and the multiple TAGs include the first TAG and the second TAG.
  • the station describes the TAG as the first TAG.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second TAG is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first TAG is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first when the TAG where the DCI is located is the first TAG.
  • MCS information Regardless of whether the TAG where the DCI is located is the first TAG or the second TAG, the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the TAG and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing the TAG and the MCS index. Correspondence between them.
  • the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second TAG is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the first information includes a PUCCH group in which the DCI is located as an example.
  • the system or the protocol may be pre-defined or the higher layer signaling or the physical layer signaling
  • the PUCCH group in which the DCI is located is the first PUCCH group, for example, the primary PUCCH group
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first. MCS information.
  • the PUCCH group in which the DCI is located is a second PUCCH group, for example, a secondary PUCCH group
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the PUCCH group in which the DCI is located is at least one of multiple PUCCH groups, and the multiple PUCCH groups include the first PUCCH group and the second PUCCH group.
  • the station may describe the PUCCH group as an angle:
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first PUCCH group is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second PUCCH group is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information and the second MCS information The information is different.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first PUCCH group is the first MCS information, and is understood to be the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index when the PUCCH group in which the DCI is located is the first PUCCH group.
  • the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the PUCCH group and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing the PUCCH group. Correspondence relationship with the MCS index. For the above, the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second PUCCH group is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the first information including the subcarrier spacing of the DCI as an example.
  • the system or the protocol may pre-specify or the high-level signaling or the physical layer signaling
  • the sub-carrier spacing of the DCI is the first sub-carrier interval, for example, 60 khz
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information.
  • the subcarrier spacing in which the DCI is located is the second subcarrier spacing, for example, 15 khz
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first MCS information is different from the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second MCS information. That is, the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first MCS information is greater than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second MCS information.
  • the subcarrier spacing of the DCI is at least one of multiple subcarrier spacings, where the multiple subcarrier spacing includes the first subcarrier spacing and the second subcarrier spacing, then the station may also be in the perspective of describing the subcarrier spacing.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first subcarrier interval is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second subcarrier interval is the second MCS information, where the first MCS The information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first subcarrier interval is the first MCS information, and it should be understood that when the subcarrier spacing of the DCI is the first subcarrier spacing, the MCS index corresponds to The MCS information is the first MCS information. Regardless of whether the subcarrier spacing of the DCI is the first subcarrier spacing or the second subcarrier spacing, the MCS index is unchanged, so the emphasis here should be the correspondence between the subcarrier spacing and the MCS information, instead of The correspondence between the subcarrier spacing and the MCS index is emphasized. For the above, the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second subcarrier interval is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the system or protocol may be pre-defined or high-level signaling or physical layer signaling, and the waveform in which the DCI is located is a first waveform, such as SC-FDMA, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information.
  • the waveform in which the DCI is located is a second waveform, such as OFDM, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the waveform corresponding to the first MCS information is different from the waveform corresponding to the second MCS information.
  • the waveform of the DCI is at least one of a plurality of waveforms, and the plurality of waveforms includes the first waveform and the second waveform.
  • the scheme may also be described as: the corresponding corresponding to the first waveform.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second waveform is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first waveform is the first MCS information, and it should be understood that when the waveform of the DCI is the first waveform, the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS. information. Regardless of whether the waveform of the DCI is the first waveform or the second waveform, the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the waveform and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing the waveform and the MCS index. Correspondence between the two. For the above, the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second waveform is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the specific example is similar to the case where the first information includes the cell or carrier where the DCI is located, and details are not described herein.
  • the first information includes a detection period of the DCI.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, an MCS index, and determining MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the detection period of the received DCI.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, an MCS index, and determining a detection period of the DCI according to the received DCI, so as to determine MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to a detection period of the DCI.
  • the detection period of the DCI belongs to at least one of the plurality of detection period sets, and the plurality of detection period sets includes the first detection period set and the second detection period set.
  • the detection period of the DCI belongs to the first detection period set, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the detection period of the DCI belongs to the second detection period set, and the terminal device determines The MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the detection period of the DCI belongs to the first detection period set, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first adjustment MCS information, or the detection period of the DCI belongs to the second detection period set, and the MCS corresponding to the MCS index The information is the second MCS information.
  • the detection period of the DCI belongs to the first detection period set. It can be understood that the detection period of the DCI is greater than or equal to the first detection period.
  • the detection period of the DCI belongs to the second detection period set. It can be understood that the detection period of the DCI is smaller than the second detection period.
  • the first detection period and the second detection period are used as two thresholds, which may be specified by protocols, or may be determined by a network device. The first detection period and the second detection period may be equal or non-equal, for example, the first detection period is greater than the second detection period.
  • the terminal device determines to select the first MCS table, and in combination with the MCS index, may determine that the first MCS information in the first MCS table is specifically selected, or if The detection period of the DCI is smaller than the second detection period, and the terminal device determines to select the second MCS table, and in combination with the MCS index, it may be determined that the second MCS information in the second MCS table is specifically selected.
  • Such a service may be a URLLC service or other more urgent services.
  • a lower BLER MCS table can be used to ensure reliability. Sex. If the detection period of the DCI is long, indicating that the demand is not very urgent, the requirements for reliability of such a service are generally not very high, and for such a service, a MCS table with a higher BLER can be used.
  • the detection period of the DCI is at least one of a plurality of detection periods, where the plurality of detection periods include the first detection period and the second detection period, and then, according to the angle describing the detection period, the scheme of the implementation manner A5 may also be described.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first detection period is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second detection period is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information and the first The second MCS information is different.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first detection period is the first MCS information, and it should be understood that, when the detection period of the DCI is the first detection period, the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is First MCS information. Regardless of whether the detection period of the DCI is the first detection period or the second detection period, the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the detection period and the MCS information, or the detection period set and The correspondence between the MCS information, rather than the correspondence between the detection period (or the detection period set) and the MCS index. For the above, the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second detection period is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the detection period of the DCI is greater than or equal to the first detection period, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the index may not be the first MCS information.
  • the detection period of the DCI may be greater than or equal to the first detection period, and the modulation and coding manner corresponding to the MCS index.
  • the information is the first MCS information, the detection period of the DCI is smaller than the first detection period, the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information, or the detection period of the DCI is greater than the first detection period, and the MCS index is The corresponding MCS information is the first MCS information, and the detection period of the DCI is less than or equal to the first detection period, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the first information includes a feedback time interval indicated by the DCI.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, an MCS index, and determining MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the feedback time interval indicated by the DCI.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining, according to the received DCI, a feedback time interval indicated by the DCI, so as to determine MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the feedback time interval indicated by the DCI.
  • the feedback time interval indicated by the DCI belongs to at least one of the plurality of time interval sets, and the plurality of time interval sets includes the first time interval set and the second time interval set.
  • the feedback time interval indicated by the DCI belongs to the first time interval set, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the feedback time interval indicated by the DCI belongs to the second time interval set.
  • the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the feedback time interval indicated by the DCI belongs to the first time interval set, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the feedback time interval indicated by the DCI belongs to the second time interval set.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the feedback time interval belongs to the first time interval set. It can be understood that the feedback time interval is greater than or equal to the first time interval, and the feedback time interval belongs to the second time interval set. It can be understood that the feedback time interval is smaller than the second time interval.
  • the first time interval and the second time interval are two threshold values, which may be specified by a protocol, or may be preset by the network device, and notify the terminal device by using high layer signaling or dynamic signaling, the first time interval and the second time interval. , may or may not be equal, for example, the first time interval is greater than the second time interval.
  • the feedback time interval is a time interval from the sending of the data included in the second information to the sending of the second HARQ response information corresponding to the data by the terminal device, or the DCI from scheduling the second information to the terminal device.
  • the time interval between sending the second message is a time interval from the sending of the data included in the second information to the sending of the second HARQ response information corresponding to the data by the terminal device, or the DCI from scheduling the second information to the terminal device.
  • the HARQ response information received by the terminal device is referred to as first HARQ response information
  • the received HARQ response information includes acknowledgement information (ACK)/negative response information (NACK), and the acknowledgement information received by the terminal device is followed.
  • ACK acknowledgement information
  • NACK negative response information
  • the negative acknowledgement information received by the terminal device is referred to as first negative acknowledgement information
  • the HARQ response information sent by the terminal device is referred to as the second HARQ response information
  • the transmitted HARQ response information also includes the acknowledgement information/negative response information
  • the acknowledgement information sent by the terminal device is also referred to as the second acknowledgement response.
  • Information, the negative response message sent by the terminal device is called the second negative response message.
  • the feedback time interval may be a time interval from the sending of the downlink data included in the second information to the sending of the second HARQ response information corresponding to the downlink data by the terminal device, or if the DCI is used.
  • the feedback time interval may be a time interval from the DCI that schedules the uplink data or the uplink control information included in the second information to the uplink data or the uplink control information that is sent by the terminal device to the second information.
  • the terminal device determines to select the first MCS table, and in combination with the MCS index, may determine that the first MCS information in the first MCS table is specifically selected, or If the feedback time interval indicated by the DCI is less than the second time interval, the terminal device determines to select the second MCS table, and in combination with the MCS index, may determine that the second MCS information in the second MCS table is specifically selected.
  • the first time interval and/or the second time interval is M1 time slot slots, or the number of symbols of M2, where M1 is an integer greater than or equal to 0, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • M1 is an integer greater than or equal to 0
  • M2 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • Such a service may be a URLLC service or other more urgent services.
  • a lower BLER MCS table can be used to ensure reliability. If the feedback interval is long, indicating that the demand is not very urgent, the requirements for reliability of such services are generally not very high. For such services, the MCS table with higher BLER can be used.
  • the feedback time interval may also be a time interval between when the DCI is transmitted from the network device or when the DCI is received from the terminal device to the maximum duration of the current traffic transmission completion.
  • the URLLC service specifies the maximum duration of the service transmission, for example, 1 ms at present, that is, from the URLLC service to the sender, to the end of the URLLC service transmission, the duration of the period must be within 1 ms.
  • the URLLC service starts to transmit. However, the transmission process has already started. For example, reference may be made to FIG. 3.
  • Point A in FIG. 3 indicates the time when the URLLC service arrives at the transmitting end.
  • Point B indicates the time when the network device transmits DCI or the time when the terminal device receives DCI
  • point C indicates the time when the current transmission process ends.
  • the time when the network device sends the DCI or the time when the terminal device receives the DCI is located after the time when the URLLC service arrives at the sending end, and the duration of transmitting the URLLC service is also the time from the point B to the point C, and the duration can also be Is the feedback time interval in this example. If the duration between point B and point C is too short, indicating that the remaining time is not much, it is suitable to use the MCS table with lower BLER to improve the reliability of transmission, and try to ensure that the service can be successfully transmitted at one time, and if point B is successful. If the length of time between C and C is longer, indicating that the remaining time is still sufficient, you can use the MCS table with higher BLER.
  • the station may also describe the time interval set.
  • the scheme of A6 is described as: the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the feedback time interval included in the first time interval set is the first MCS information, and the feedback time interval included in the second time interval set is corresponding to the The MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the feedback time interval included in the first time interval set is the first MCS information, which should be understood as when the feedback time interval belongs to the first time interval set.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information. Regardless of whether the feedback time interval belongs to the first time interval set or the second time interval set, the MCS index is unchanged, therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the feedback time interval and the MCS information, or It is the correspondence between the time interval set and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing the correspondence between the feedback time interval (or time interval set) and the MCS index.
  • the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the feedback time interval included in the second time interval set is the second MCS information is also the same.
  • the division of "equal to” is also performed. Similar to the embodiment A5, the present embodiment only divides the case where the feedback time interval is equal to the first time interval into a time interval greater than the first time interval. The situation is consistent as an example, and the actual is not limited to this. For details of the case of "equal to”, refer to Embodiment A5, and no further description is provided.
  • the time at which the downlink data included in the second information is sent may be the time when the network device sends the downlink data included in the second information, or the time when the terminal device receives the downlink data included in the second information, which is not used in this embodiment.
  • the time when the network device sends the downlink data included in the second information is taken as an example.
  • the time interval from the sending of the downlink data included in the second information to the sending of the second HARQ response information corresponding to the downlink data by the terminal device includes, but is not limited to, at least one of the following implementation manners:
  • time interval between an index of a symbol in which the downlink data included in the second information is transmitted and an index in which the terminal device transmits a second HARQ response information corresponding to the downlink data, where the time interval is, for example, a difference between two indexes. ;
  • time interval between an index of a time slot in which the downlink data included in the second information is transmitted and an index in a time slot in which the terminal device sends the second HARQ response information corresponding to the downlink data, where the time interval is, for example, two indexes. Difference.
  • the first information includes a modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI and/or a modulation and coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI, and further includes a format of the DCI.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, an MCS index, and a modulation coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI and/or a modulation coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI. And determining, by the format of the DCI, MCS information corresponding to the MCS index.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, an MCS index, and determining, according to the received DCI, a modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI and/or a modulation and coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI, and Describe the format of the DCI, so as to determine the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the modulation coding mode table indicated by the DCI and/or the modulation coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI, and the format of the DCI.
  • the format of the DCI may include a first DCI format and a second DCI format
  • the DCI of the first DCI format may be referred to as a compact DCI
  • the DCI of the second DCI format may be referred to as a fallback DCI.
  • the DCI of the first DCI format is a DCI applicable to the URLLC service.
  • the DCI of the second DCI format is a DCI applicable to all services, such as DCI format 0_0 and DCI format 1_0.
  • the DCI of the third DCI format may be a DCI in the NR system or the LTE system. That is, the DCI of the service is not distinguished, such as DCI format 0_1 and DCI format 1_1.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is mainly applied to the DCI of the first DCI format, that is, the DCI received by the terminal device is the DCI of the first DCI format.
  • the DCI includes a first bit information field and a second bit information field, where the first bit information field can be used to carry the first information, and the terminal device can determine, according to the first information bit field, a modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI. And/or the modulation coding mode index offset value indicated by the DCI.
  • the second information bit field includes a number of bits greater than or equal to one.
  • the sum of the size of the first bit information field and the size of the second bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format is equal to the size of the second bit information field in the DCI of the second DCI format.
  • the second information bit field including but not limited to at least one of the following implementations:
  • the number of bits in the second bit information field is less than or equal to 2, and the second bit information field is used to indicate a feedback time from the second information to the HARQ response information;
  • the second bit information field is used to indicate the time domain resource occupied by the second information, where the number of bits of the second bit information field is less than or equal to 3.
  • the number of bits in the second bit information field is equal to 1, and the second bit information field is used to indicate a redundancy version (RV), and the redundancy version is 0 or 3;
  • the fourth bit information field is used to indicate the transmit power command word of the terminal device, and the transmit power command word is 0 or 3;
  • the number of bits in the second bit information field is equal to 4, and the second bit information field is used to indicate the modulation and coding mode index.
  • the second bit information field is used to indicate the feedback time from the second information to the second HARQ response information, that is, the feedback time interval described in the foregoing embodiment A6 is indicated, and the second bit information is The domain may belong to the downlink data to the HARQ feedback time indication (PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator) in the DCI.
  • the function of the PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing may be continued by using the second bit information field in the PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator of the DCI, that is, continue to indicate the feedback time interval, and utilize the The first bit information field in the DCI carries the first information.
  • the size of the PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field of the second format may be greater than or equal to the sum of the size of the first bit information field of the DCI of the first DCI format and the size of the second bit information field.
  • the size of the PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field of the second format is equal to the sum of the size of the first bit information field of the DCI of the first DCI format and the size of the second bit information field.
  • the size of the second bit information field is less than or equal to X1-1 bits, and the size of the first bit information field is greater than or equal to 1 bit.
  • the first bit information field is not included, but the second bit information field is included.
  • the first bit information field and the second bit information field included in the DCI of the first DCI format are all considered to belong to the PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field, but are included by using the PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field.
  • Different bits implement different functions.
  • the first bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format is regarded as an independent bit information field, but only the second bit information field of the first DCI is considered to be second according to the configuration or the predefined definition.
  • the second bit field information field of the DCI is reduced. It can be understood that the first bit information field no longer belongs to the PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field.
  • the unit of the bit information field is a time slot.
  • the PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field may be appropriately reduced, or it may be understood that the bit information field used to implement the original function of the PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field is appropriately reduced, and the PDSCH is After the -to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field is reduced, the remaining bits originally belonging to the PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field can be used to carry the first information. Or after the reduction, the number of bits saved can be used to indicate the first information.
  • the total number of bits of the first DCI and the total number of bits of the second DCI can be set to be the same, which can reduce the number of blind detections and save power for the terminal device.
  • the second bit information field is used to indicate the time domain resource occupied by the second information. If the DCI of the first DCI format is used to schedule downlink data, the second bit information field may belong to the PDSCH in the DCI. Time domain (time-domain PDSCH resource), if the DCI of the first DCI format is used to schedule uplink data or uplink control information, the second bit information field may belong to a time domain of the PUSCH resource in the DCI (time-domain) PUSCH resources).
  • the time-domain PDSCH resource of the DCI or the second bit information field of the time-domain PUSCH resources may be used to continue to implement the functions of the time-domain PDSCH resource or the time-domain PUSCH resources, that is, And continuing to indicate the time domain resource occupied by the second information, and using the time-domain PDSCH resource of the DCI or the first bit information field in the time-domain PUSCH resources to carry the first information.
  • the size of the time-domain PDSCH resource or the time-domain PUSCH resources in the DCI of the first DCI format may be greater than or equal to the sum of the size of the first bit information field and the size of the second bit information field.
  • the size of the time-domain PDSCH resource or the time-domain PUSCH resources is equal to the sum of the size of the first bit information field and the size of the second bit information field, and the size of the second bit information field is smaller than Or equal to X2-1 bits, the size of the first bit information field is greater than or equal to 1 bit.
  • the first bit information field and the second bit information field are considered to belong to the time-domain PDSCH resource or the time-domain PUSCH resources.
  • the first bit information field and the second bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format are also considered to belong to the time-domain PDSCH resource or the time-domain PUSCH resources, but only the time-domain PDSCH resource or
  • the different bits included in the time-domain PUSCH resources implement different functions.
  • the first bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format may be regarded as an independent bit information field. Or predefining that the second bit information field of the first DCI is smaller than the second bit field information field of the second DCI, it can be understood that the first bit information field no longer belongs to the time-domain PDSCH resource or the time-domain PUSCH resources. .
  • the time-domain PUSCH resource is used to indicate the length of the time domain resource occupied by the PDSCH.
  • the time-domain PUSCH resource is used to indicate the length of the time domain resource occupied by the PUSCH.
  • the time-domain PDSCH resource or the time-domain PUSCH resources may be appropriately reduced, or may be understood as a bit information domain that will be used to implement the original function of the time-domain PDSCH resource or the time-domain PUSCH resources. If the time-domain PDSCH resource or the time-domain PUSCH resources are reduced, the remaining bits that belong to the time-domain PDSCH resource or the time-domain PUSCH resources can be used to carry the first information. Or it can be understood that the reduced number of bits can be used to indicate the first information.
  • the second bit information field is used to indicate the redundancy version, then the second bit information field may belong to the RV field in the DCI.
  • the function of the RV field can be continued by using the second bit information field in the RV field of the DCI, that is, continuing to indicate the redundancy version, and utilizing the first bit in the RV field of the DCI
  • the information field carries the first information.
  • the size of the RV field in the DCI of the first DCI format may be greater than or equal to the sum of the size of the first bit information field and the size of the second bit information field.
  • the size of the RV field is equal to the sum of the size of the first bit information field and the size of the second bit information field, and the size of the second bit information field is equal to X3-1 bits, and the first bit information field The size is equal to 1 bit.
  • the first bit information field and the second bit information field do not belong to the RV field.
  • the first bit information field and the second bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format also belong to the RV field, but different functions are implemented by using different bits included in the RV field.
  • the first bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format is regarded as an independent bit information field, but only the second bit information field of the first DCI is considered to be second according to the configuration or the predefined definition.
  • the second bit field information field of the DCI is reduced. It can be understood that the first bit information field no longer belongs to the RV field.
  • the receiver can achieve self-decoding after a successful transmission, without the need for subsequent transmission, but if the RV version is 1 or 2, then only one time. A part of the information can be transmitted, and the remaining information is further transmitted by means of the next transmission.
  • the URLLC service has strict time requirements for the completion of the service transmission, for example, 1 ms, and there is a good chance that there will be no retransmission. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application considers that For the URLLC service, it is more reasonable to select 0 or 3 for the RV version.
  • the second bit information field can be used to indicate that the RV version is 0 or 3, and the remaining 1 bit of the RV field can be utilized to carry the first. information. Or it can be understood that the reduced number of bits can be used to indicate the first information.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific indication result of the second bit information field.
  • the RV version may be 0 or 1
  • the RV version may be 1 or 2, and the like.
  • the second bit information field is used to indicate the transmit power command word of the terminal device, and the second bit information field may belong to a transmit power control (TPC) field in the DCI. Then, if the DCI of the first DCI format is used to schedule downlink data, the second bit information field may belong to a TPC command for scheduled PUCCH in the DCI, if the DCI of the first DCI format is used. For scheduling uplink data or uplink control information, the second bit information field may belong to a PUSCH command for scheduled PUSCH in the DCI.
  • TPC transmit power control
  • the size of the TPC field is equal to X4 bits.
  • the second bit information field in the TPC field of the DCI can be used to continue to implement the function of the TPC field, that is, continue to indicate the transmit power command word, and the first in the TPC field using the DCI
  • the bit information field carries the first information.
  • the size of the TPC field in the DCI of the first DCI format may be greater than or equal to the sum of the size of the first bit information field and the size of the second bit information field.
  • the size of the TPC field is equal to the sum of the size of the first bit information field and the size of the second bit information field, and the size of the second bit information field is equal to X4-1 bits, and the first bit information field The size is equal to 1 bit.
  • the first bit information field and the second bit information field do not belong to the TPC field.
  • the first bit information field and the second bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format are also considered to belong to the TPC field, but different functions are implemented by using different bits included in the TPC field, or It is considered that the first bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format is regarded as an independent bit information field, but only the second bit information field of the first DCI is considered to be the second of the second DCI according to the configuration or the predefined definition.
  • the bit field information domain is reduced. It can be understood that the first bit information field no longer belongs to the TPC field.
  • the specific indication manner of the second bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format includes, but is not limited to, the following possibilities:
  • the second bit information field is 1 bit, used to indicate 0, or indicate +3/+4;
  • the second bit information field is 1 bit, used to indicate +1, or indicate +3/+4;
  • the second bit information field is 1 bit, used to indicate 0, or indicate +1.
  • the second bit information field indication is 0, indicating that the transmission power is not adjusted, and the second bit information field indication is +3, indicating that the transmission power is adjusted upward by 3 units, and so on.
  • the second bit information field may also indicate a factor of downward power adjustment.
  • the second bit information field is 1, for indicating +1, or indicating -3/-4/- 1, wherein the second bit information field indicates -3, indicating that the transmission power is adjusted downward by 3 units, and so on.
  • the content of the second bit information field is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second bit information field is used to indicate the modulation and coding mode index, and the second bit information field may belong to the MCS field in the DCI. This information field is used to indicate the MCS index.
  • the function of the MCS field may be continued by using the second bit information field in the MCS field of the DCI, that is, continuing to indicate the modulation and coding mode index, and using the first of the MCS fields of the DCI.
  • the bit information field carries the first information.
  • the size of the MCS field in the DCI of the first DCI format may be greater than or equal to the sum of the size of the first bit information field and the size of the second bit information field.
  • the size of the MCS field is equal to the sum of the size of the first bit information field and the size of the second bit information field, and the size of the second bit information field is equal to X5-1 bits, and the first bit information field The size is equal to 1 bit.
  • the first bit information field and the second bit information field do not belong to the MCS field.
  • the first bit information field and the second bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format are all considered to belong to the MCS field, but different functions are implemented by using different bit information included in the MCS field, or It is considered that the first bit information field in the DCI of the first DCI format is regarded as an independent bit information field, but only the second bit information field of the first DCI is considered to be the second of the second DCI according to the configuration or the predefined definition.
  • the bit field information field is reduced. It can be understood that the first bit information field no longer belongs to the MCS field.
  • the CQI table is indicated by 4 bits, and the CQI table and the MCS table corresponding to the same BLER are corresponding, that is, it is also possible to use 4 bits to indicate the MCS table. Therefore, the remaining 1 bit in the MCS field can be used to carry the first information or the reduced number of bits can be used to indicate the first information, thereby making better use of the DCI resources.
  • the premise of this embodiment is that the DCI has an information field for triggering the terminal device to report the A-CSI, and the DCI can instruct the terminal device to report the A-CSI through the information field.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the A-CSI indicated by the DCI.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the A-CSI indicated by the DCI according to the received DCI, so as to determine the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the A-CSI indicated by the DCI.
  • the A-CSI indicated by the DCI is at least one of a plurality of A-CSIs, and the multiple A-CSIs include a first CSI and a second CSI. Then, the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes the first CSI, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes the second CSI, the terminal device determines that the The MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes the second CSI
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information
  • the network device or the protocol may pre-define the correspondence between the A-CSI and the BLER, and the terminal device may learn the correspondence between the A-CSI and the BLER through the protocol, or the corresponding relationship may also pass the high-level signaling or the dynamic letter.
  • the order is notified to the terminal device.
  • the first CSI corresponds to the first BLER
  • the second CSI corresponds to the second BLER. If the DCI indicates that the terminal device reports the first CSI, it indicates that the terminal device needs to report the CSI of the first BLER, and if the DCI indicates that the terminal device reports the second.
  • the CSI indicates that the terminal device needs to report the CSI of the second BLER.
  • the first CSI and the second CSI are both A-CSI.
  • the first CSI corresponds to the first.
  • the BLER, the first BLER corresponding to the first MCS table may be considered that the first CSI corresponds to the first MCS table, the second CSI corresponds to the second BLER, and the second BLER corresponds to the second MCS table, The second CSI also corresponds to the second MCS table.
  • the terminal device may determine that the first MCS table is selected, and in combination with the MCS index, the terminal device may determine the first MCS information in the first MCS table, and if The DCI instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI, and the terminal device can determine that the second MCS table is to be selected, and in combination with the MCS index, the terminal device can determine the second MCS information in the second MCS table.
  • the first CSI and the second CSI may be CSI reports, or may be information items included in a specific CSI.
  • the A-CSI indicated by the DCI is at least one of multiple A-CSIs, where the multiple A-CSIs include the first CSI and the second CSI, and the A-CSI may be used to describe the A-CSI.
  • the scheme is described as follows: the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first CSI is the first MCS information, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second CSI is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information and the first The second MCS information is different.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first CSI is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is First MCS information.
  • the MCS index is unchanged, therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the A-CSI and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing A- Correspondence between CSI and the MCS index.
  • the CSI includes one or more CSI content, and the CSI content includes CQI, RI, PMI, and the like.
  • the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes slowly changing information, such as RI and/or RSRP, indicating that the CSI may be a less urgent service, a higher MCS table with a BLER is required.
  • the CSI included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes fast information, such as CQI and/or PMI, indicating that the CSI may be a more urgent service, a lower MCS table of the BLER is required.
  • the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes CSI part 2, indicating that the CSI may be a less urgent service, an MCS table with a higher BLER is needed.
  • the CSI included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI includes only CSI part 1, indicating that the CSI may be a more urgent service, a lower MCS table of the BLER is required.
  • the correspondence between the MCS table and the BLER is not limited, that is, the corresponding manner of the BLER and the MCS table may be pre-defined or high-level signaling configuration.
  • the terminal device determines the MCS index, and determines the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the CSI content included in the CSI.
  • the CSI includes the number of bit information of one or more CSIs, and the CSI content includes bit information of CQI, RI, PMI, and the like. If the number of bit information included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI is greater than or equal to the first number of bits, indicating that the CSI may be a less urgent service, an MCS table with a higher BLER is required. If the number of bit information included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI is less than the second number of bits, indicating that the CSI may be a more urgent service, an MCS table with a lower BLER is required.
  • the terminal device determines the MCS index, and determines the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the number of bit information of the CSI included in the CSI.
  • the CSI included in the DCI indicated by the DCI corresponds to multiple BLERs, where the multiple BLERs include the highest BLER and the lowest BLER, wherein the highest BLER refers to the BLER with the largest value, and the lowest BLER refers to The minimum value of the BLER, the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the MCS information corresponding to the specific BLER.
  • the CSI included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI corresponds to multiple BLERs, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the MCS information corresponding to the specific BLER.
  • the specific BLER is, for example, the highest BLER, that is, the BLER with the largest value, for example, the MCS information corresponding to the highest BLER is the first MCS information, or the specific BLER is, for example, the lowest BLER, that is, the BLER with the smallest value.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the lowest BLER is the second MCS information, or the specific BLER may be other BLERs except the highest BLER and the lowest BLER.
  • the CSI includes one or more CSI reports, and different CSI reports may correspond to different BLERs, and the CSI included in the DCI indicated A-CSI may correspond to multiple BLERs.
  • the terminal device may select one MCS table from multiple MCS tables, and the selected one may be the MCS table corresponding to the highest BLER or the MCS table corresponding to the lowest BLER. Combined with the MCS index, the MCS information can be determined.
  • the MCS table corresponding to which BLER is selected by the terminal device it may be pre-defined by the protocol or notified by high layer signaling or dynamic signaling.
  • Embodiment A8 can be applied separately or in combination.
  • the ASI indicated by the DCI corresponds to multiple BLERs, and the multiple BLERs include the highest BLER and the lowest BLER.
  • the scheme of Embodiment A8 may also be described as: highest.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the BLER is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the lowest BLER is the second MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the lowest BLER is The first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the highest BLER is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the highest BLER is the first MCS information, which should be understood as the MCS corresponding to the MCS index when the A-CSI indicated by the DCI is the CSI corresponding to the highest BLER.
  • the information is the first MCS information.
  • the BLER corresponding to the A-CSI indicated by the DCI is the highest BLER or the lowest BLER, the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the A-CSI and the MCS information, or A- The correspondence between the BLER and the MCS information corresponding to the CSI, instead of emphasizing the correspondence between the A-CSI (or the BLER corresponding to the A-CSI) and the MCS index.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the lowest BLER is the second MCS information, or the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the lowest BLER is the first MCS information, or the highest BLER corresponding to the
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information, and the understanding is the same.
  • the division of "equal to” is also performed. Similar to the embodiment A5, the embodiment only divides the number of bit information included in the A-CSI indicated by the DCI to be equal to the first number of bits and is indicated by the DCI. The case where the number of pieces of bit information included in the A-CSI is larger than the number of bits of the first bit is consistent, and the actual number is not limited thereto. For details of the case of "equal to”, refer to Embodiment A5, and no further description is provided.
  • the first information includes a CCE aggregation level of the DCI.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, an MCS index, and determining MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the CCE aggregation level of the DCI.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, an MCS index, and determining a CCE aggregation level of the DCI according to the received DCI, so as to determine MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to a CCE aggregation level of the DCI.
  • the CCE aggregation level of the DCI belongs to at least one of a plurality of aggregation level sets, and the multiple aggregation level sets include a first aggregation level set and a second aggregation level set.
  • the CCE aggregation level of the DCI belongs to the first aggregation level set, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the CCE aggregation level of the DCI belongs to the second aggregation level set, and the terminal device determines the location.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the CCE aggregation level of the DCI belongs to the first aggregation level set
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the CCE aggregation level of the DCI belongs to the second aggregation level set
  • the MCS index The corresponding MCS information is the second MCS information.
  • the CCE aggregation level of the DCI belongs to the first aggregation level set. It can be understood that the aggregation level of the DCI is smaller than the first aggregation level, and the aggregation level of the DCI belongs to the second aggregation level set. It can be understood that the aggregation level of the DCI is greater than or equal to
  • the second aggregation level, the first aggregation level and the second aggregation level are used as two thresholds, which may be specified by a protocol, or may be preset by the network device, and notify the terminal device by using high layer signaling or dynamic signaling, the first aggregation level.
  • the second aggregation level may be equal or not equal, for example, the first aggregation level is less than the second aggregation level.
  • the probability that the terminal device can receive the DCI is higher, and then the reliability requirement of the terminal device is likely to be high, and the MCS table with a lower BLER can be used to ensure the reliability.
  • the terminal device may not receive the DCI. Therefore, if the reliability requirement of the terminal device is not very high at this time, the MCS table with higher BLER may be used.
  • MCS tables there are two MCS tables, which are a first MCS table and a second MCS table.
  • the BLER corresponding to the first MCS table is 10e-3
  • the BLER corresponding to the second MCS table is 10e-5.
  • the CCE aggregation level of the DCI is 4, and belongs to the first aggregation level set.
  • the terminal device determines to select the first MCS table, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information in the first MCS table, or the CCE of the DCI.
  • the aggregation level is 8 or 16, which belongs to the second aggregation level set.
  • the terminal device determines to select the second MCS table, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information in the second MCS table.
  • the CCE aggregation level of the DCI belongs to at least one of the multiple aggregation level sets, where the multiple aggregation level set includes the first aggregation level set and the second aggregation level set, then the station may also describe the aggregation level set.
  • the solution of the embodiment A9 is described as follows: the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first aggregation level set is the first MCS information, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second aggregation level set is the second MCS information.
  • the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first aggregation level set is the first MCS information, and it should be understood that when the CCE aggregation level of the DCI belongs to the first aggregation level set, the MCS index corresponds to The MCS information is the first MCS information.
  • the MCS index is unchanged, therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the aggregation level set and the MCS information, or It is a correspondence between the CCE aggregation level of the DCI and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing the correspondence between the aggregation level set (or the CCE aggregation level of the DCI) and the MCS index.
  • the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second aggregation level set is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the division of "equal to” is also performed. Similar to the embodiment A5, the embodiment only divides the aggregation level of the DCI to be equal to the second aggregation level, and the aggregation level with the DCI is greater than the second aggregation.
  • the case of the level is consistent as an example, and the actual is not limited to this. For details of the case of "equal to”, refer to Embodiment A5, and no further description is provided.
  • the first information includes the CORSET where the DCI is located.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the CORSET where the DCI is located.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining, according to the received DCI, the CORSET where the DCI is located, so as to determine the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the CORSET where the DCI is located.
  • the CORSET in which the DCI is located belongs to at least one of a plurality of CORSET sets, and the plurality of CORSET sets includes a first CORSET set and a second CORSET set.
  • the CORSET where the DCI is located belongs to the first CORSET set, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the CORSET where the DCI is located belongs to the second CORSET set, and the terminal device determines the MCS.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the index is the second MCS information.
  • a corresponding resource element group (REG) bundle size in the first CORSET set belongs to a first REG binding size set, and/or a corresponding REG in the second CORSET set.
  • the binding size belongs to the second REG binding size collection.
  • the CORSET where the DCI is located belongs to the first CORSET set
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the CORSET where the DCI is located belongs to the second CORSET set
  • the MCS index corresponds to
  • the MCS information is the second MCS information, and can also be understood as: the REG binding size of the DCI belongs to the first REG binding size set, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the REG where the DCI is located is tied.
  • the fixed size belongs to the second set of REG bindings, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the REG binding size belongs to the first REG binding size set. It can be understood that the REG binding size is smaller than the first REG binding size, and the REG binding size belongs to the second REG binding size set.
  • the fixed size is greater than or equal to the second REG binding size.
  • the first REG binding size and the second REG binding size are used as two thresholds, which may be specified by a protocol, or may be preset by a network device, and notify the terminal device by using high layer signaling or dynamic signaling, and the first REG binding
  • the size and the second REG binding size may or may not be equal. For example, the first REG binding size is smaller than the second REG binding size.
  • the probability that the terminal device can receive the DCI is higher. Then, the reliability requirement of the terminal device is likely to be high, and the MCS table with a lower BLER can be used to ensure the reliability. On the other hand, in the low REG binding size, the terminal device may not receive the DCI. Therefore, if the reliability requirement of the terminal device is not very high, the MCS table with a higher BLER may be used.
  • MCS tables there are two MCS tables, which are a first MCS table and a second MCS table.
  • the BLER corresponding to the first MCS table is 10e-3
  • the BLER corresponding to the second MCS table is 10e-5.
  • the REG binding size of the DCI is 2, and belongs to the first REG binding size set.
  • the terminal device determines that the first MCS table is selected, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information in the first MCS table, or The DCI binding size of the DCI is 6, and belongs to the second REG binding size set.
  • the terminal device determines to select the second MCS table, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information in the second MCS table.
  • the CORSET in which the DCI is located belongs to at least one of the multiple CORSET sets, and the multiple CORSET sets include the first CORSET set and the second CORSET set.
  • the scheme description of Embodiment A10 may also be described.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first CORSET set is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second CORSET set is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information and the first The second MCS information is different.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first CORSET set is the first MCS information, and it should be understood that, when the CORSET where the DCI is located belongs to the first CORSET set, the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is First MCS information. Regardless of whether the CORSET in which the DCI is located belongs to the first CORSET set or the second CORSET set, the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the CORSET set and the MCS information, or the DCI.
  • the correspondence between CORSET and MCS information rather than the correspondence between the CORSET set (or CORSET where DCI is located) and the MCS index. For the above, the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second CORSET set is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the division of "equal to” is also performed. Similar to the embodiment A5, this embodiment is only divided into the DCI where the REG binding size of the DCI is equal to the second REG binding size. The case where the REG binding size is larger than the second REG binding size is consistent, and the actual is not limited to this. For details of the case of "equal to”, refer to Embodiment A5, and no further description is provided.
  • the method may be further configured to: determine, by the terminal device, an MCS index, and determine MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the subcarrier spacing where the DCI is located.
  • the subcarrier spacing of the resource in which this embodiment and the second information are located is similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first information determined according to the DCI as described above can be understood as the information directly determined according to the DCI.
  • the first information determined according to the DCI is introduced below.
  • the first information determined according to the DCI described below can be understood as Indirectly based on information determined by DCI.
  • determining the first information may include: determining, according to the resource where the second information transmitted by the DCI is located, determining the first information, where A message includes at least one of the following:
  • the BWP where the resource where the second information is located is located
  • the TAG where the resource where the second information is located is located
  • the PUCCH group where the resource where the second information is located is located;
  • the PUCCH format corresponding to the resource where the second information is located
  • the time domain length of the resource where the second information is located is located.
  • the second information is determined according to the DCI, and the first information is determined according to the resource where the second information is located, it can be understood that this is indirectly determining the first information according to the DCI.
  • the manner in which the terminal device and the network device determine the first information is the same, and the determined first information is also the same.
  • the first information is introduced from the perspective of the terminal device, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is determined according to the first information.
  • the process of determining the first information, or the determined The content of a message is similar.
  • the resource where the second information is located may be understood as a resource for carrying the second information, because when the first information is determined, the second information has not been sent, and thus is described as the resource where the second information is located.
  • the terminal device determines the resource where the second information is located, and may be determined by the DCI.
  • the DCI may indicate the resource where the second information is located, or may be specified by a protocol, or may be determined by using high layer signaling or other dynamic signaling.
  • the first information includes a carrier where the resource where the second information is located.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the carrier where the resource where the second information is located.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining a carrier where the resource of the second information that is received by the received DCI is located, and determining the MCS index according to the carrier where the resource where the second information is located is located. Corresponding MCS information.
  • the carrier where the resource where the second information is located is at least one of multiple carriers, and the multiple carriers include the first carrier and the second carrier.
  • the carrier where the resource where the second information is located is the first carrier
  • the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the carrier where the resource where the second information is located is the second carrier.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the carrier in which the resource where the second information is located is the first carrier
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the carrier where the resource where the second information is located is the second carrier.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the system may transmit the URLLC service on a specific carrier and carry other services on other carriers. If the second information is transmitted through the carrier carrying the URLLC service, the second information belongs to the URLLC service and the URLLC service. If higher reliability is required, the MCS table with lower BLER can be selected. If the second information is transmitted through the carrier carrying other services, the second information belongs to other services except the URLLC service, and the reliability of other services. If there is no high URLLC service, you can use the MCS table with higher BLER.
  • the carrier where the resource where the second information is located is the primary carrier, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information.
  • the carrier where the resource where the second information is located is the secondary carrier, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the first carrier is a carrier that carries other services than the URLLC service.
  • the system supports multiple MCS tables to support two MCS tables.
  • the terminal device can determine the BLER high according to the first carrier.
  • the MCS table for example, the first MCS table is selected, and in combination with the MCS index, the terminal device can determine which MCS information in the first MCS table is selected, for example, the first MCS information is selected.
  • the second carrier is a carrier carrying the URLLC service, and the system continues to support the two MCS tables.
  • the terminal device can determine, according to the second carrier, the MCS table with a low BLER, for example, the second MCS table is selected.
  • the terminal device can determine which MCS information in the second MCS table is selected, for example, the second MCS information is selected.
  • the primary carrier corresponding MCS table is a first MCS table, and then the first MCS information is determined.
  • the MCS corresponding to the secondary carrier is a second MCS table, and then the second MCS information is determined.
  • the correspondence between the carrier and the MCS information may be system pre-defined or higher layer signaling or physical layer signaling.
  • the carrier where the resource where the second information is located belongs to at least one of the multiple carriers, and the multiple carriers include the first carrier and the second carrier, and then, according to the description of the carrier, the scheme of the implementation manner of the method A11 may also be described.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first carrier is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second carrier is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information and the second MCS The information is different.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first carrier is the first MCS information
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is First MCS information.
  • the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the carrier and the MCS information, instead of emphasizing the carrier and the Correspondence between MCS indexes.
  • the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second carrier is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the first information may further include a cell where the resource where the second information is located, a BWP where the resource where the second information is located, a TAG where the resource where the second information is located, a PUCCH group where the resource where the second information is located, and a PUCCH group At least one of a subcarrier spacing of the resource where the second information is located, a PUCCH format corresponding to the resource where the second information is located, and a waveform of the resource where the second information is located, where the first information includes the resource where the second information is located
  • the case of the carrier is similar, so it is placed next to Embodiment A11 and introduced.
  • the cell where the first information includes the resource where the second information is located as an example.
  • the system or protocol may be pre-specified or reported by higher layer signaling or physical layer signaling, some cells correspond to MCS tables with high block error rate, and some cells correspond to MCS tables with low block error rate, for example, provision, first The cell corresponds to an MCS table of high block error rate, and the first cell corresponds to an MCS table of low block error rate. Then, the cell in which the resource where the second information is located is the first cell, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the carrier where the resource where the second information is located is the second cell.
  • the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the cell in which the second information is located is the first cell
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the cell where the resource where the second information is located is the second cell
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the first cell is a macro cell
  • the second cell is a micro cell
  • the second cell is a macro cell
  • the first cell is a micro cell.
  • the BWP where the resource where the second information is located, the TAG where the resource where the second information is located, the PUCCH group where the resource where the second information is located, the subcarrier spacing of the resource where the second information is located, and the resource where the second information is located The content of the PUCCH format and the waveform of the resource in which the second information is located is similar to the case where the first information includes the cell or carrier in which the resource in which the second information is located, and is similar to A4, and is not described again.
  • the first information includes a time domain length of the resource where the second information is located.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the time domain length of the resource where the second information is located.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining a time domain length of the resource in which the second information indicated by the received DCI is located, thereby determining the length according to the time domain length of the resource where the second information is located. MCS information corresponding to the MCS index.
  • the time domain length of the resource where the second information is located belongs to at least one of the multiple time domain length sets, and the multiple time domain length set includes the first time domain length set and the second time domain length set.
  • the time domain length of the resource where the second information is located belongs to the first time domain length set, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the time domain of the resource where the second information is located.
  • the length belongs to the second time domain length set, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS mode index is the second MCS information.
  • the time zone length of the resource in which the second information is located belongs to the first time domain length set, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the length of the time domain of the resource where the second information is located belongs to The second time domain length set, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS mode index is the second MCS information.
  • the resource in which the second information is located may be a PDSCH, a PUSCH, or a PUCCH
  • the time domain length of the resource in which the determined second information is located may be a time domain length of the PDSCH, the PUSCH, or the PUCCH carrying the second information, where the time domain length is
  • the unit may be a symbol, a time slot or a mini time slot, etc., and is not specifically limited.
  • the time domain length of the resource in which the second information is located belongs to the first time domain length set. It can be understood that the time domain length of the resource where the second information is located is greater than or equal to the first time domain length, and the resource of the second information is located.
  • the time domain length belongs to the second time domain length set. It can be understood that the time domain length of the resource where the second information is located is smaller than the second time domain length.
  • the first time domain length and the second time domain length are used as two thresholds, which may be specified by a protocol, or may be preset by a network device, and notify the terminal device by using high layer signaling or dynamic signaling, the first time domain length and the first The two time domain lengths may or may not be equal. For example, the first time domain length is less than the second time domain length.
  • the time domain of the resource where the second information is located is small, indicating that the second information may be a more urgent service, or the transmission time reserved for the second information is shorter, an MCS table with a lower BLER is required. Therefore, it is ensured that the second information can be successfully transmitted in a short time, and in the case that the time domain of the resource where the second information is located is large, the second information may be a less urgent service, or left to If the transmission time of the second information is large, the MCS table with a higher BLER can be used.
  • the terminal device determines that the first MCS table is selected, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS table.
  • the first MCS information, or the time domain length of the resource in which the second information is located is smaller than the second time domain length, belongs to the second time domain length set, and the terminal device determines to select the second MCS table, and the MCS corresponding to the MCS index
  • the information is the second MCS information in the second MCS table.
  • the time domain length of the resource where the second information is located belongs to at least one of the multiple time domain length sets, and the multiple time domain length sets include the first time domain length set and the second time domain length set, then the station description
  • the aspect of the time domain length set may also be described as the scenario of the embodiment A12: the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first time domain length set is the first MCS information, and the second time domain length set corresponds to the The MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the first time domain length set is the first MCS information, and it should be understood that when the time domain length of the resource where the second information is located belongs to the first time domain length set.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information. Regardless of whether the time domain length of the resource in which the second information is located belongs to the first time domain length set or the second time domain length set, the MCS index is unchanged, therefore, the emphasis should be on the time domain length set and the MCS.
  • the correspondence between MCS indexes is described. For the above, the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second time domain length set is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the division of "equal to” is also performed. Similar to the embodiment A5, the embodiment only divides the time domain length of the resource where the second information is equal to the length of the first time domain. The case where the time domain length of the resource where the second information is located is greater than the length of the first time domain is consistent, and the actual is not limited thereto. For details of the case of "equal to”, refer to Embodiment A5, and no further description is provided.
  • Each of the embodiments in the mode A may be applied separately, or any of the several embodiments may be combined. Among them, a content of the first information can be considered as an implementation manner.
  • the first information is determined according to the number of times the first HARQ response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, where the first HARQ response information is the first acknowledgement information or the first negative acknowledgement. information.
  • the determined first information may also have one or more types.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the determining mode described in the foregoing mode B is a manner in which the terminal device determines the first information.
  • the determining, by the network device, the first information may include:
  • the first information is determined according to the number of times the first HARQ response information is sent in the first time window, and the first HARQ response information is the first acknowledgement information or the first negative acknowledgement information.
  • the first information determined by the network device may also have one or more types.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the reason why the first negative acknowledgement information is not received may be a packet loss due to a network failure or the like, and for the network device, the first HARQ response message should be sent for each data transmitted. Therefore, the network device may not consider the number of times the first negative acknowledgement information is not transmitted within the first time window.
  • the first information determined by the terminal device and the first information determined by the network device should be the same. For example, both the terminal device and the network device determine that the first information includes the carrier where the DCI is located.
  • the first information is introduced from the perspective of the terminal device, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is determined according to the first information.
  • the process of determining the first information, or the determined The content of a message is similar.
  • the first time window may be specified by a protocol, or may also be configured by a network device, and the terminal device is notified by high layer signaling or dynamic signaling.
  • the first time window is, for example, a unit time at which the time of receiving the DCI carrying the MCS information is the termination time, determining whether the time of the MCS information is the unit time of the termination time, or starting from the time of receiving the first acknowledgement information.
  • the time of the first first negative response information received after receiving the first acknowledgement information is the termination time, or the time when the first acknowledgement information is received is the start time, to receive the The moment when the first HARQ response information is not received for the first time after the first positive response message is the termination time, or the time when the first acknowledgement information is received is the start time, after receiving the first acknowledgement information
  • the end time of the preset duration is the end time.
  • the first positive response information here may be any one of the first positive response information during the transmission process, or the start time and the end time of the time unit.
  • the time at which the MCS information is determined can be understood as the start time or the end time of the symbol at which the time of the MCS information is determined, or the start time or the end time of the time slot in which the time at which the MCS information is determined is determined.
  • the time at which the DCI carrying the MCS information is received may be understood as the start time or the end time or index of the symbol at which the time of receiving the DCI carrying the MCS information is located, or the time slot in which the time of receiving the DCI carrying the MCS information is received. Start time or end time or index.
  • the time at which the first acknowledgement information is received may be understood as the start time or end time or index of the symbol at which the first acknowledgement information is received, or the time slot in which the time at which the first acknowledgement information is received is understood. Start time or end time or index.
  • the time at which the first negative response information is received may be understood as the start time or end time or index of the symbol at which the first negative acknowledgement information is received, or the time slot in which the time at which the first negative acknowledgement information is received is understood. Start time or end time or index.
  • the time or index of not receiving the first HARQ response information may be understood as the start time or the end time or index of the symbol at which the first HARQ response information is not received, or the time at which the first HARQ response information is not received.
  • the start or end time or index of the time slot may be understood as the start time or the end time or index of the symbol at which the first HARQ response information is not received, or the time at which the first HARQ response information is not received.
  • the ending time of the preset duration after receiving the first acknowledgement information may be understood as the start or end time or index of the symbol where the end time of the preset duration after receiving the first acknowledgement information is located Or, it is understood as the start time or end time or index of the time slot in which the end time of the preset duration after receiving the first acknowledgement information is located.
  • unit time can be understood as a symbol, a time slot or a mini time slot. If the time when the first time window is to determine the MCS information is the unit time of the termination time, it can be understood that the first time window is the end time for determining the MCS information, and the Z1 unit time is pushed forward, and Z1 is positive. Integer. If the first time window is the unit time at which the time of receiving the DCI carrying the MCS information is the termination time, it can be understood that the first time window is the termination time at the time of receiving the DCI carrying the MCS information, and pushing the Z2 forwards. Unit time, Z2 is a positive integer. For example, the first time window is set to 1 ms.
  • the start time and the end time at which a time unit is located can be understood as the number of times the first HARQ response information is received on one time unit and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, wherein one time unit can be Y1 times. Gap or Y2 symbols.
  • the time unit can be pre-defined or high-level signaling or dynamic signaling, and Y1 and Y2 are positive integers.
  • the first time window is the start time of receiving the first positive response information, and the end time of the preset time length after receiving the first positive response information is the termination time, the first affirmation may be received.
  • the information is acknowledged, it is determined to enter a first time window, and a timer is started.
  • the timer duration is a preset duration.
  • the time when the first acknowledgement information is received is the start time, and the time when the first HARQ response information is not received for the first time after receiving the first acknowledgement information is the termination time.
  • the first information under mode B is described below.
  • the first information includes the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may also be described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and according to the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, Determining MCS information corresponding to the MCS index.
  • the method may also be described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the number of times the first negative acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, thereby The number of times the first negative response information is received in the window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received determines the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the MCS index.
  • the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received belongs to at least one of the plurality of sets of times, the plurality of sets of times including the first set of times and the first Two sets of times.
  • the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first The MCS information, or the number of times the first negative acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the HARQ response information is not received belongs to the second set of times, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS. information.
  • the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received belongs to the first time set, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information.
  • the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the HARQ response information is not received belongs to the second set of times, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received belongs to the first set of times, which may be understood as receiving the first negative response in the first time window.
  • the number of times of information and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received is less than the first number, and the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received belongs to the second
  • the set of times can be understood as the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received is greater than or equal to the second number of times.
  • the first and second times are used as two thresholds, which may be specified by a protocol, or may be preset by a network device, and notified to the terminal device by using high layer signaling or dynamic signaling, the first number of times and the second number of times may be Equal, they may not be equal, for example, the first number is less than the second number.
  • Receiving the first negative acknowledgement message indicating that the network device receives the error, or indicating that the uplink data transmission error of the terminal device, but not receiving the first negative acknowledgement message, which may also indicate that the network device receives the error, or may indicate the uplink data transmission of the terminal device. error. If the number of times of receiving the first negative response message and/or not receiving the first HARQ response message is large, the network device always receives an error, and since the time of the end of the service transmission is getting closer, the lower BLER corresponding to the BLER is selected. MCS form.
  • the terminal device determines to select the first MCS table, and the MCS corresponding to the MCS index.
  • the information is the first MCS information in the first MCS table, or the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received belongs to the second set of times, and the terminal device determines The second MCS table is selected, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information in the second MCS table.
  • the scheme of the embodiment B1 can also be described as: the number of times the first number of times includes the first negative response information received in the first time window and/or not
  • the number of times the first HARQ response information is received, the corresponding MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, and the second number of times includes the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or is not received.
  • the number of times of the first HARQ response information, the MCS information corresponding to the corresponding MCS index is the second MCS information, wherein the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the first number of times includes the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, and the corresponding MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is
  • the first MCS information is understood to be the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, and the MCS index corresponds to the first time set.
  • the MCS information is the first MCS information. Regardless of whether the number of times of receiving the first negative response information and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received in the first time window belongs to the first time set or the second number of times, the MCS index is unchanged.
  • the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the set of times and the MCS information, or the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received and the MCS information.
  • the correspondences rather than the set of emphasized times (or the number of times the first negative response information is received and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received within the first time window) and the MCS index relationship.
  • the division of "equal to” also occurs. Similar to the embodiment A5, the embodiment only uses the number of times the first negative response information will be received in the first time window and/or the first HARQ is not received. The case where the number of times of the response information is equal to the second number is divided into the case where the number of times of receiving the first negative response information in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received is greater than the second number, as an example, the actual Not limited to this. For details of the case of "equal to", refer to Embodiment A5, and no further description is provided.
  • the first information includes the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received within the first time window.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index according to the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and determining the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received within the first time window, thereby determining the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received within the first time window.
  • the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the MCS index is described.
  • the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received within the first time window belongs to at least one of the plurality of sets of times, and the plurality of sets of times includes a third set of times and a fourth set of times.
  • the number of times that the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window belongs to the third set of times, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or receives the first time in the first time window.
  • the number of times of affirmative response information belongs to the fourth set of times, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the number of times the first positive response information is received in the first time window belongs to the third time set, the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the first affirmation is received in the first time window.
  • the number of times of the response information belongs to the fourth set of times, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window belongs to the third set of times. It can be understood that the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window is greater than or equal to the third number.
  • the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the time window belongs to the fourth set of times. It can be understood that the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window is less than the fourth number of times.
  • the third and fourth times are used as two thresholds, which may be specified by a protocol, or may be preset by a network device, and notified to the terminal device by high layer signaling or dynamic signaling, and the third and fourth times may be equal. It may also be unequal, for example, the third number is greater than the fourth number.
  • Receiving the first positive response message, indicating that the network device receives the correct can also indicate that the uplink data transmission of the terminal device is correct. If the number of times of receiving the first acknowledgement information is small, the network device always receives an error. Since the time from the end of the service transmission is getting closer, the MCS table corresponding to the low BLER is selected, and if the first acknowledgement is received, If the number of times of information is large, it means that the network device receives correctly. At this time, you can consider selecting the MCS table corresponding to the high BLER.
  • MCS tables there are two MCS tables, which are a first MCS table and a second MCS table.
  • the BLER corresponding to the first MCS table is 10e-3
  • the BLER corresponding to the second MCS table is 10e-5.
  • the number of times that the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window belongs to the third time set, and the terminal device determines that the first MCS table is selected, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is in the first MCS table.
  • the first MCS information, or the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window belongs to the third time set, and the terminal device determines to select the second MCS table, where the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is The second MCS information in the second MCS table.
  • the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window belongs to at least one of the plurality of sets of times, and the plurality of sets of times includes the third set of times and the fourth set of times, then the station is at the angle of the set of times of description
  • the solution of the embodiment B2 may also be described as: the third number of times includes the number of times the first positive response information is received in the first time window, and the corresponding MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first The MCS information, the fourth time set includes the number of times the first positive response information is received in the first time window, and the corresponding MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information, where the first MCS information and the second MCS The information is different.
  • the first time set includes the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window, and the corresponding MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, which should be understood as being the first MCS information, which should be understood as being the first
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information when the number of times of the first acknowledgement information is received in the time window. Regardless of whether the number of times the first positive response information is received in the first time window belongs to the third time set or the fourth number set, the MCS index is unchanged, therefore, the emphasis should be on the set of times and the MCS information.
  • the division of "equal to” is also appeared. Similar to the embodiment A5, the embodiment only divides the case where the number of times of receiving the first positive response information in the first time window is equal to the third number is divided into The example is consistent with the case where the number of times of receiving the first positive response information in the first time window is greater than the third number, and is not limited thereto. For details of the case of "equal to”, refer to Embodiment A5, and no further description is provided.
  • the first information includes the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window. The ratio between the two.
  • the total number of times that the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window may be determined by the uplink data sent by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the first HARQ response information every time one uplink data is sent. .
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may also be described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and according to the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received. And determining, by the ratio between the total number of times that the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window, the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and the number of times the first negative acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, and the first time window should be And a ratio between the total number of times the first HARQ response information is received, so that the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received is the same as the first time window And determining, by the ratio between the total number of times of the first HARQ response information, the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the MCS index.
  • the ratio between the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window It belongs to at least one of a plurality of ratio sets, and the plurality of ratio sets includes a first ratio set and a second ratio set.
  • the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the first HARQ response information is not received.
  • the ratio of the number of times to the total number of times that the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to the second ratio set, and the terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the ratio is the first ratio set, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received,
  • the ratio between the total number of times that the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to the second ratio set, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the ratio between the total number of HARQ response information belongs to the second ratio set, which can be understood as the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, and The ratio between the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window is greater than or equal to the second ratio.
  • the first ratio and the second ratio are used as two thresholds, which may be specified by a protocol, or may be preset by the network device, and the terminal device is notified by high layer signaling or dynamic signaling, and the first ratio and the second ratio may be equal. It may also be unequal, for example, the first ratio is less than the second ratio.
  • Receiving the first negative response message indicating that the network device receives the error, or may also indicate the uplink data transmission error of the terminal device. If the ratio between the number of times the first negative response message is received and the number of times the first HARQ response message should be received is large, it indicates that the number of times of receiving the first negative response message is large, indicating that the network device always receives an error, because the distance service transmission ends. The time is getting closer and closer, so the MCS table corresponding to the low BLER is selected, and if the ratio between the number of times the first negative response message is received and the number of times the first HARQ response message should be received is small, the first reception is indicated. If the number of negative acknowledgment messages is small, it means that the network device receives correctly. In this case, you can consider selecting the MCS table corresponding to the high BLER.
  • the terminal device determines to select the first MCS table, the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information in the first MCS table, or the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window.
  • the terminal device determines to select the second MCS table.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information in the first MCS table, or the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window.
  • the method belongs to at least one of the plurality of ratio sets, and the plurality of ratio sets include the first ratio set and the second ratio set.
  • the station is described as describing the ratio set, and the scheme of the embodiment B3 may also be described as:
  • the first ratio set includes the number of times the first negative acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window
  • the ratio of the corresponding MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information
  • the second ratio set includes the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the first HARQ response information is not received.
  • the number of times, the ratio of the total number of times that the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window, the MCS information corresponding to the corresponding MCS index is the second MCS information, , The first information and the second MCS different MCS information.
  • the first set of ratios includes the number of times the first negative acknowledgement information is received within the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, and the first HARQ response should be received within the first time window.
  • the ratio of the total number of times of the information, the corresponding MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, which should be understood as the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the first one is not received.
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, and the ratio of the number of times of the HARQ response information to the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to the first ratio set.
  • the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received within the first time window is Whether the first ratio set or the second ratio set, the MCS index is unchanged, therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the set of values and the MCS information, or the first time in the first time window.
  • the understanding that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index corresponding to the second ratio set is the second MCS information is the same.
  • the division of "equal to” also occurs. Similar to the embodiment A5, the embodiment only uses the number of times the first negative response information will be received in the first time window and/or the first HARQ is not received. The ratio of the number of times of response information to the total number of times the first HARQ response message should be received within the first time window, the case of being equal to the second ratio is divided into the number of times the first negative response message is received within the first time window and The ratio between the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window is consistent with the case where the second ratio is greater than the second ratio. For details of the case of "equal to", refer to Embodiment A5, and no further description is provided.
  • the first information includes a ratio between the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may also be described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and receiving the first acknowledgement information within the first time window, and receiving the first time window
  • the ratio between the total number of HARQ response messages determines the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, the MCS index, and the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window, and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window. a ratio between the two, such that the MCS index is determined according to a ratio between the number of times the first positive response information is received in the first time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window Modulation coding mode information.
  • the first information includes a ratio between the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to at least one of the plurality of ratio sets One, the plurality of ratio sets includes a third ratio set and a fourth ratio set.
  • a ratio between the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to a third ratio set, and the terminal device determines that The MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, or the ratio between the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window, The terminal device determines that the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the ratio between the number of times the first positive response information is received in the first time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to the third ratio set, the MCS index.
  • Corresponding MCS information is the first MCS information, or the ratio between the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to the first
  • the four-value set, the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information.
  • the ratio between the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to the third ratio set, which can be understood as The ratio between the number of times the first positive response message is received in a time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response message should be received in the first time window is greater than or equal to the third ratio, and the first time is received in the first time window.
  • the ratio of the number of positive response messages to the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to the fourth ratio set, which can be understood as the first acknowledgement information received in the first time window.
  • the ratio of the number of times to the total number of times the first HARQ response message should be received within the first time window is less than the fourth ratio.
  • the third ratio and the fourth ratio are used as two thresholds, which may be specified by a protocol, or may be preset by a network device, and notified to the terminal device by high layer signaling or dynamic signaling, and the third ratio and the fourth ratio may be equal. It may also be unequal, for example, the third ratio is greater than the fourth ratio.
  • Receiving the first positive response message indicating that the network device receives the correct, or may also indicate that the uplink data transmission of the terminal device is correct. If the ratio between the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received and the number of times the first HARQ response information should be received is small, it indicates that the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received is small, indicating that the network device always receives an error, because the distance service transmission ends. The time is getting closer and closer, so the MCS table corresponding to the low BLER is selected, and if the ratio between the number of times the first negative response message is received and the number of times the first HARQ response message should be received is large, the first reception is indicated. If the number of negative response messages is large, it means that the network device receives correctly. In this case, you can consider selecting the MCS table corresponding to the high BLER.
  • the terminal device determines to select the first MCS.
  • the table, the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information in the first MCS table, or the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window, and the first HARQ should be received in the first time window.
  • the ratio between the total number of times of the response information belongs to the fourth set of ratios.
  • the terminal device determines to select the second MCS table, and the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the second MCS information in the second MCS table.
  • the first information includes a ratio between the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to at least one of the plurality of ratio sets One, the plurality of ratio sets include a third ratio set and a fourth ratio set. Then, from the perspective of describing the set of ratios, the scheme of the embodiment B4 may also be described as being described as: the third ratio set includes The ratio of the number of times the first positive response information is received in a time window to the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window, and the corresponding MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information.
  • the fourth ratio set includes a ratio of the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window to the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window, corresponding to the corresponding MCS index
  • the MCS information is the second MCS information, wherein the first MCS information is different from the second MCS information.
  • the third ratio set includes a ratio between the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window, the corresponding location
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information, which should be understood as the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window, and the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window.
  • the ratio is the third ratio set
  • the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index is the first MCS information.
  • the ratio of the number of times the first positive response information is received in the first time window to the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the first time window belongs to the third ratio set or the fourth ratio set.
  • the MCS index is unchanged. Therefore, the emphasis should be on the correspondence between the ratio set and the MCS information, or the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received in the first time window, and in the first time window.
  • the ratio between the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received, and the correspondence between the MCS information, rather than the emphasized ratio set (or the number of times the first positive response information is received within the first time window, and at the first
  • the correspondence between the ratio of the total number of times the first HARQ response information should be received in the time window and the MCS index.
  • the division of "equal to” also occurs. Similar to the embodiment A5, the embodiment only takes the number of times the first positive response information is to be received in the first time window, and should be within the first time window. a ratio between the total number of times of receiving the first HARQ response information, the case of being equal to the third ratio is divided into the number of times the first acknowledgement information is received within the first time window, and the first HARQ response should be received within the first time window The ratio between the total number of times of information is greater than the case of the third ratio, and is not limited to this. For details of the case of "equal to", refer to Embodiment A5, and no further description is provided.
  • the first MCS information and the second MCS information are different.
  • the first MCS information and the second MCS information may be the same.
  • Each of the embodiments in the mode B may be applied separately, or any of the several embodiments may be combined. Among them, a content of the first information can be considered as an implementation manner.
  • any of the modes A and B can also be combined, and an example of the combination of the embodiment under the mode A and the embodiment of the mode B is described below, for example, the embodiment A1 and the embodiment B1 are used. Combine.
  • Embodiment A1 is that the first information includes a modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI
  • Embodiment B1 is that the first information includes the number of times of receiving the first negative response information in the first time window and/or is not received. The number of times the first HARQ response message.
  • the method may be further described as: determining, by the terminal device, an MCS index, and a modulation and coding mode table according to the DCI, and the first information includes receiving the first negative response information in the first time window. The number of times and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, determines the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index.
  • the first information includes a modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI
  • the modulation and coding mode table indicated by the DCI is at least one of a plurality of modulation and coding mode tables.
  • the plurality of modulation coding mode tables include a first modulation coding mode table and a second modulation coding mode table.
  • the first information includes the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, in the first time window.
  • the number of times the first negative response information is received and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received belongs to at least one of the plurality of sets of times.
  • the plurality of sets of times includes a first set of times and a second set of times, the first set of times includes a number of times of receiving the first negative response information within the first time window and/or not received
  • the number of times of the first HARQ response information, the second number of times set includes the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received .
  • the modulation coding mode table indicated by the DCI is the first table, and the number of times the first negative response information is received in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received
  • the modulation coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index is the first modulation and coding mode information
  • the modulation coding mode table indicated by the DCI is the second table or the first
  • the modulation coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index is when the number of times of receiving the first negative response information and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received belongs to the first time set.
  • the second modulation coding mode information is when the number of times of receiving the first negative response information and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received belongs to the first time set.
  • the combination mode is similar, and no further description is provided herein.
  • the MCS information is determined by the terminal device as an example.
  • the network device also determines the MCS information in the same manner as the terminal device, and does not repeat them.
  • first ratio set can also be understood as “first ratio range”, or “first number set” can also be understood as “ The first number of ranges”, and so on.
  • first ratio set can also be understood as “first ratio range”
  • first number set can also be understood as “ The first number of ranges”, and so on.
  • the included elements may be a continuous range of values, or may be discrete values of at least one value, and are not limited in specific terms.
  • the existing MCS table can be continuously extended without modifying the MCS table, and it is easier to adapt the existing protocol.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication method, in which the current MCS table can be directly modified, so that the terminal device can directly determine the MCS information as long as the MCS index is obtained.
  • the application scenario shown in FIG. 1 is continued to be applied as an example. The flow of this method is described below.
  • the network device determines modulation and coding mode information, where the modulation and coding mode information includes a modulation mode, a coding rate, and a block error rate, where the block error rate is at least two block error rates.
  • the at least two block error rates include the first block error rate and the second block error rate;
  • the network device determines a modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the modulation and coding mode information, where the modulation and coding mode index is one of N modulation and coding mode indexes, and the N modulation coding mode indexes are 0 to N-1.
  • the N modulation coding indexes satisfy at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device determines the modulation and coding mode index.
  • the terminal device determines the modulation and coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index.
  • the terminal device transmits the second information according to the determined modulation and coding mode information.
  • the second information includes data and/or control information, which includes, for example, CSI, and may also include other information.
  • the second information may be carried by the PUSCH or by the PDSCH.
  • the second information may be uplink data and/or uplink control information carried in the PUSCH, or the second information may be downlink data carried in the PDSCH. And/or downlink control information.
  • S45 is an optional step because the terminal device does not necessarily transmit the second information.
  • the arrows used to represent the optional steps are drawn as dashed lines to distinguish them from other steps.
  • the second information may be uplink information or downlink information, it is represented by a double-headed arrow in FIG. 4, that is, the two-way arrow does not mean that both the terminal device and the network device send the first information, but only indicates the second information.
  • the information may be sent by the terminal device or by the network device.
  • the network device may indicate the MCS index to the terminal device by using the DCI, and the terminal device may determine the MCS index according to the received DCI.
  • the MCS field is included in the DCI, and the MCS field may indicate the MCS index.
  • the MCS index may be pre-configured by the protocol, and the terminal device and the network device may directly determine, or the MCS index may be configured by the network device to the terminal device by using other signaling such as higher layer signaling.
  • the network device may determine the MCS information in the same manner as the terminal device, that is, determine the MCS index specified by the protocol, thereby determining the MCS information corresponding to the MCS index. If the MCS index is configured to the terminal device through DCI or higher layer signaling, the network device may first select the MCS information, determine the MCS index corresponding to the MCS information, and then pass the MCS index through DCI or higher layer signaling. Configured for the terminal device.
  • At least one new MCS table may be provided, and one of the MCS tables is taken as an example, for example, it is referred to as a first MCS table.
  • the N MCS indexes are the MCS indexes included in the first MCS table.
  • the applicable MCS table may correspond to 1 BLER
  • the newly provided first MCS table may correspond to at least 2 BLERs
  • the first An MCS table corresponds at least to the first BLER and the second BLER.
  • the MCS information may be randomly arranged, or, because the BLER is considered, in the first MCS table, the MCS information may be arranged according to the BLER, specifically, according to the BLER arrangement.
  • the arrangement includes, but is not limited to, at least one of the following possibilities:
  • Possibility 1 Arranged in order from low to high BLER, and arranged in a comb shape.
  • the first MCS table corresponds to two BLERs, which are a first BLER and a second BLER, respectively, where the first BLER is 10e-5 and the second BLER is 10e-3.
  • the order of arrangement is, for example, first BLER->second BLER->first BLER->second BLER, which can be referred to Table 2.
  • the MCS index A to the MCS index B corresponds to the first block error rate
  • the MCS indexes corresponding to the same BLER are discontinuous
  • the MCS index corresponding to the other BLERs is inserted in the middle.
  • MCS information corresponds to one MCS index and a series of parameters.
  • the MCS table may include other parameters in addition to the parameters shown in Table 2, but is not related to the solution of the present application, so it will not be enumerated one by one.
  • the value of the code rate is not related to the scheme of the present application, so it is not written in Table 2.
  • the first MCS table provided by the embodiment of the present application may include at least one item shown in Table 2, and may also include other possible items not shown in Table 2.
  • the MCS index may also be smaller than 32.
  • the MCS index may also be greater than 32.
  • the first MCS table may also correspond to more BLERs and the like.
  • an item in Table 2 represents one MCS information in Table 2. It can be understood that one or several of the items in Table 2 can constitute a new Table 2, which is also within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the network device Arranged in the manner shown in Table 2, so that the efficiency values in the entire table are also arranged from small to large.
  • the physical meaning of the system's efficiency value is spectral efficiency. Generally speaking, the bigger the better, but it is also limited.
  • SNR signal-to-noise ratio
  • the network device needs to select the MCS information first. For example, the network device selects the MCS information in at least one item included in the table 2. When the network device selects the MCS information, It can be selected in combination with the efficiency value. Compared with the random arrangement, the arrangement is used to make the network devices search in order, which saves the search time.
  • Possibility 2 arranged in order of BLER from high to low.
  • the first MCS table corresponds to three BLERs, which are a first BLER, a second BLER, and a third BLER, respectively, where the first BLER is 10e-1, the second BLER is 10e-2, and the third BLER is 10e-5.
  • the order of arrangement is, for example, first BLER->second BLER->third BLER, which can be referred to Table 3.
  • MCS information corresponds to one MCS index and a series of parameters.
  • the MCS table may include other parameters in addition to the parameters shown in Table 3, but it is not related to the solution of the present application, so it will not be enumerated one by one.
  • the value of the code rate is not related to the scheme of the present application, so it is not written in Table 3.
  • the first MCS table provided by the embodiment of the present application may include at least one item shown in Table 3, and may also include other possible items not shown in Table 3.
  • the MCS index may also be greater than 32.
  • the first MCS table may also correspond to more BLERs and the like.
  • one of the items in Table 3 represents one MCS information in Table 3. It can be understood that one or several of the items in Table 3 can form a new table 3, which is also within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the first MCS table provided by the embodiment of the present application may include at least one item shown in Table 2 and/or Table 3, and may also include other possible items not shown in Table 2 and Table 3.
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • the network device needs to select the MCS information first, for example, the network device selects the MCS information in at least one item included in Table 3.
  • the network device selects the MCS information, it can be selected in combination with the SINR. Compared with the random arrangement, the network device can be searched in order, which saves the search time.
  • the values of the first BLER and the second BLER are not limited to the size of the at least two BLERs corresponding to the provided MCS table. And / or priority.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the size relationship between the first BLER and the second BLER, and/or does not limit the priority between the first BLER and the second BLER.
  • the MCS table is newly provided, and the terminal device only needs to determine the MCS index to directly determine the MCS information, and the manner is relatively simple.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 can be applied in the scenario of transmitting a URLLC service or other similar services.
  • the terminal device may perform uplink transmission or downlink transmission, and the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 may be applied to the terminal device transmission.
  • the uplink transmission of the terminal device transmits the URLLC service, and the uplink transmission of the terminal device can be applied to the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or as shown in FIG.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment, and the downlink transmission of the terminal device transmits other services except the URLLC service, and the downlink transmission of the terminal device may apply the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 4
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments shown in the present disclosure may not be used in the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the technical solutions in the prior art may be used.
  • FIG. 5 shows a communication device 500, such as a terminal device.
  • the communication device 500 can implement the functions of the terminal device referred to above.
  • the communication device 500 may be the terminal device described above, or may be a chip disposed in the terminal device described above.
  • the communication device 500 can include a processor 501 and a transceiver 502.
  • the processor 501 can be used to perform S24, S25, and S26 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • Transceiver 502 can be used to perform S21, S23, and S27 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the processor 501 is configured to determine a modulation and coding mode index
  • the processor 501 is further configured to determine first information, where the determining the first information includes:
  • the first HARQ response information is the first affirmation Response information or first negative response information
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 600, such as a network device.
  • the communication device 600 can implement the functions of the network devices referred to above.
  • the communication device 600 may be the network device described above or may be a chip disposed in the network device described above.
  • the communication device 600 can include a processor 601 and a transceiver 602.
  • the processor 601 can be used to perform S22 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver 602 can be used to perform S21, S23, and S27 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the processor 601 is configured to determine modulation and coding mode information
  • the processor 601 is further configured to determine a first information and a modulation and coding mode index, where the first information and the modulation and coding mode index are used to indicate the modulation and coding mode information;
  • the transceiver 602 is configured to send the first information by using a DCI.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 700, such as a terminal device.
  • the communication device 700 can implement the functions of the terminal device referred to above.
  • the communication device 700 may be the terminal device described above, or may be a chip disposed in the terminal device described above.
  • the communication device 700 can include a processor 701, and optionally, a transceiver 702.
  • the processor 701 can be used to perform S43 and S44 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • Transceiver 702 can be used to perform S45 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the processor 501 is configured to determine a modulation coding mode index, where the modulation coding mode index is one of N modulation coding indexes, and the N modulation coding indexes include at least one of the following:
  • the processor 501 is further configured to determine modulation coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index, where the modulation and coding mode information includes a modulation mode, an encoding code rate, and a block error rate, where the error block rate is at least two errors.
  • the modulation and coding mode information includes a modulation mode, an encoding code rate, and a block error rate, where the error block rate is at least two errors.
  • One of the block rates, the at least two block error rates including the first block error rate and the second block error rate.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 800, such as a network device.
  • the communication device 800 can implement the functions of the network devices referred to above.
  • the communication device 800 can be the network device described above or can be a chip disposed in the network device described above.
  • the communication device 800 can include a processor 801 and a transceiver 802.
  • the processor 801 can be used to perform S41 and S42 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • Transceiver 802 can be used to perform S45 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the processor 801 is configured to determine modulation and coding mode information, where the modulation and coding mode information includes a modulation mode, an encoding code rate, and a block error rate, where the error block rate is one of at least two error block rates.
  • the at least two block error rates include the first block error rate and the second block error rate;
  • the processor 801 is further configured to determine a modulation and coding mode index corresponding to the modulation and coding mode information, where the modulation and coding mode index is one of N modulation and coding indexes, and the N modulation and coding indexes include at least one of the following:
  • communication device 500, communication device 600, communication device 700, or communication device 800 can also be implemented by the structure of communication device 900 as shown in FIG. 9A.
  • the communication device 900 can implement the functions of the network device or terminal device referred to above.
  • the communication device 900 can include a processor 901. Wherein, when the communication device 900 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the processor 901 can be used to execute S24, S25, and S26 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or Other processes for supporting the techniques described herein. When the communication device 900 is used to implement the functions of the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the processor 901 can be used to perform S22 in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the processor 901 can be used to execute S43 and S44 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and/or to support this document.
  • Other processes of the described techniques When the communication device 900 is used to implement the functions of the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, the processor 901 can be used to execute S41 and S42 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and/or to support this document. Other processes of the described techniques.
  • the communication device 900 can pass through a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), a central processor (central processor). Unit, CPU), network processor (NP), digital signal processor (DSP), microcontroller (micro controller unit (MCU), or programmable logic device (programmable logic device, The PLD) or other integrated chip implementation, the communication device 600 can be disposed in the network device or the communication device of the embodiment of the present application, so that the network device or the communication device implements the method for transmitting a message provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FPGA field-programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • MCU microcontroller
  • programmable logic device programmable logic device
  • the communication device 900 can include a transceiver component for communicating with a network device.
  • the transceiver component can be used to execute S21, S23, and S27 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and / or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver component may be used to execute S45 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and/or to support this document. Other processes of the described techniques.
  • the communication device 900 can also include a memory 902, which can be referenced in FIG. 9B, where the memory 902 is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor 901 is used to decode and execute the computer programs or instructions. .
  • these computer programs or instructions may include the functional programs of the network devices or terminal devices described above.
  • the function program of the network device is decoded and executed by the processor 901
  • the network device can be implemented to implement the functions of the network device in the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device may be configured to implement the terminal device in the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the functional programs of these network devices or terminal devices are stored in a memory external to the communication device 900.
  • the function program of the network device is decoded and executed by the processor 901, part or all of the contents of the function program of the network device are temporarily stored in the memory 902.
  • the function program of the terminal device is decoded and executed by the processor 901, part or all of the contents of the function program of the terminal device are temporarily stored in the memory 902.
  • the functional programs of these network devices or terminal devices are disposed in a memory 902 stored within the communication device 900.
  • the communication device 900 can be disposed in the network device of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the function program of the terminal device is stored in the memory 902 inside the communication device 900, the communication device 900 can be disposed in the terminal device of the embodiment of the present application.
  • portions of the functional programs of the network devices are stored in a memory external to the communication device 900, and other portions of the functional programs of the network devices are stored in the memory 902 internal to the communication device 900.
  • part of the contents of the functional programs of the terminal devices are stored in a memory external to the communication device 900, and other portions of the functional programs of the terminal devices are stored in the memory 902 inside the communication device 900.
  • the communication device 600, the communication device 600, the communication device 700, the communication device 800, and the communication device 900 are presented in the form of dividing each functional module into functions, or the functional modules may be divided in an integrated manner.
  • a “module” herein may refer to an ASIC, a processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuitry, and/or other devices that provide the functionality described above.
  • the communication device 500 provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 can also be implemented in other forms.
  • the communication device includes a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module can be implemented by the processor 501, and the transceiver module can be implemented by the transceiver 502.
  • the processing module can be used to perform S24, S25, and S26 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module can be used to perform S21, S23, and S27 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • a processing module is configured to determine a modulation coding mode index
  • the processing module is further configured to determine the first information, where the determining the first information includes:
  • the transceiver module Determining the first information according to the number of times the transceiver module receives the first HARQ response information in the first time window and/or the number of times the first HARQ response information is not received, where the first HARQ response information is a first acknowledgement Information or first negative response information;
  • the communication device 600 provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 can also be implemented in other forms.
  • the communication device includes a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module can be implemented by the processor 601, and the transceiver module can be implemented by the transceiver 602.
  • the processing module can be used to perform S22 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module can be used to perform S21, S23, and S27 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • a processing module is configured to determine modulation and coding mode information
  • the processing module is further configured to determine a first information and a modulation and coding mode index, where the first information and the modulation and coding mode index are used to indicate the modulation and coding mode information;
  • a transceiver module configured to send the first information by using a DCI.
  • the communication device 700 provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 can also be implemented in other forms.
  • the communication device includes a processing module, and optionally, a transceiver module.
  • the processing module can be implemented by the processor 701, and the transceiver module can be implemented by the transceiver 702.
  • the processing module can be used to perform S43 and S44 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module can be used to perform S45 in the embodiment shown in Figure 4, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module is configured to determine a modulation coding mode index, where the modulation coding mode index is one of N modulation coding indexes, and the N modulation coding indexes include at least one of the following:
  • the processing module is further configured to determine modulation coding mode information corresponding to the modulation and coding mode index, where the modulation and coding mode information includes a modulation mode, an encoding code rate, and a block error rate, where the error block rate is at least two error blocks. One of the rates, the at least two block error rates including the first block error rate and the second block error rate.
  • the communication device 800 provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 can also be implemented in other forms.
  • the communication device includes a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module can be implemented by the processor 801, and the transceiver module can be implemented by the transceiver 802.
  • the processing module can be used to perform S41 and S42 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module can be used to perform S45 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module is configured to determine modulation and coding mode information, where the modulation and coding mode information includes a modulation mode, an encoding code rate, and a block error rate, wherein the error block rate is one of at least two error block rates,
  • the at least two block error rates include the first block error rate and the second block error rate;
  • the processing module is further configured to determine a modulation coding mode index corresponding to the modulation and coding mode information, where the modulation coding mode index is one of N modulation coding indexes, and the N modulation coding indexes include at least one of the following:
  • the communication device 500, the communication device 600, the communication device 700, the communication device 800, and the communication device 900 provided by the embodiments of the present application may be used to execute the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. Therefore, the technical effects that can be obtained can be referred to the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
  • Embodiments of the present application are described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, devices (systems), and computer program products according to embodiments of the present application. It will be understood that each flow and/or block of the flowchart illustrations and/or FIG.
  • These computer program instructions can be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine for the execution of instructions for execution by a processor of a computer or other programmable data processing device.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be passed from a website site, computer, server or data center Wired (eg, coaxial cable, fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a digital versatile disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (eg, a solid state disk (SSD) ))Wait.
  • a magnetic medium eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape
  • an optical medium eg, a digital versatile disc (DVD)
  • DVD digital versatile disc
  • semiconductor medium eg, a solid state disk (SSD)

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Detection And Prevention Of Errors In Transmission (AREA)

Abstract

一种通信方法及设备，用于使得向终端设备通知所选择的调制编码方式信息的方式更好地适配URLLC业务的需求。其中的一种通信方法包括：确定调制编码方式索引；确定第一信息；根据第一信息，确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息；其中，确定第一信息包括：根据接收的DCI确定第一信息，或，根据在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，确定第一信息，第一HARQ应答信息为第一肯定应答信息或第一否定应答信息。

Description

一种通信方法及设备
本申请要求在2018年1月12日提交中国专利局、申请号为201810033549.9、申请名称为“一种通信方法及设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法及设备。
背景技术
国际电信联盟(international telecommunication union，ITU)为第五代移动通信系统(the fifth generation，5G)以及未来的移动通信系统定义了三大类应用场景：增强型移动宽带(enhanced mobile broadband，eMBB)、高可靠低时延通信(ultra reliable and low latency communications，URLLC)以及海量机器类通信(massive machine type communications，mMTC)。
其中，URLLC业务对时延要求极高，从发送端到接收端的单向传输时延要求在0.5毫秒(millisecond，ms)以内，并且在1ms以内在达到99.999％的传输可靠性。
目前5G新无线技术(new radio，NR)中通过了，相比eMBB业务的误块率(block error rate，BLER)为0.1，URLCC可以支持更低误块率(block error rate，BLER)的调制编码方式(modulation coding scheme，MCS)表格。
在网络设备和终端设备的通信过程中，终端设备可根据MCS表格中的某种MCS信息完成对数据的调制编码或解调解码等处理。为了使得网络设备和终端设备选择相同的MCS信息，则网络设备和终端设备也需要确定MCS表格。目前所支持的网络设备向终端设备通知MCS表格的方式，是采用高层信令进行通知，终端设备在收到新的高层信令通知之前，还是默认使用之前的MCS表格。而URLLC业务对时延要求高，网络设备需要在URLLC业务的低时延需求内，根据终端设备的实际情况灵活动态地选择所使用的MCS信息。因此通过高层信令的半静态的方式向终端设备通知所使用的MCS表格，无法实现网络设备为终端设备灵活选择的MCS表格和对应的MCS信息，可见，目前的网络设备向终端设备通知MCS信息的方式无法适配URLLC业务的需求。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及设备，用于使得向终端设备通知所选择的调制编码方式信息的方式更好地适配URLLC业务的需求。
第一方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法可由通信设备执行，该通信设备例如为终端设备。该方法包括：确定调制编码方式索引；确定第一信息；根据所述第一信息，确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息；其中，所述确定第一信息包括：根据接收的DCI确定所述第一信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，确定所述第一信息，所述第一HARQ应答信息为第 一肯定应答信息或第一否定应答信息。或者，所述确定第一信息包括：根据接收的DCI，和，在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，确定所述第一信息，所述第一HARQ应答信息为第一肯定应答信息或第一否定应答信息。
本申请实施例中，终端设备根据第一信息就可以确定调制编码方式索引所对应的调制编码方式信息，从而终端设备可根据确定的调制编码方式信息对第二信息进行调制或解调等处理，而第一信息可以是采用动态方式通知给终端设备的，例如根据DCI确定第一信息、或第一接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数等确定第一信息，都是采用动态方式确定第一信息，无需借助于半静态的高层信令来通知，从而能够满足URLLC业务的需求，使得向终端设备通知调制编码方式信息的方式更能适配URLLC业务的需求。另外，终端设备确定第一信息时，可以单独根据接收的DCI确定，或者单独根据在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数确定，或者根据接收的DCI和在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数确定，方式较为灵活。
在一个可能的设计中，根据接收的DCI确定所述第一信息，所述第一信息包括以下至少一种：所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格；所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值；所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔；和，所述DCI所指示的A-CSI。
终端设备可以根据接收的DCI确定第一信息，DCI例如可以用于调度第二信息，那么通过DCI来确定第一信息，可无需网络设备再额外发送其他的信息来使得终端设备确定第一信息，有助于节省传输资源，也提高资源的利用率。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格，所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格为多个调制编码方式表格中的至少一个，所述多个调制编码方式表格包括第一调制编码方式表格和第二调制编码方式表格，所述第一调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
本申请实施例中，系统可以支持至少一个调制编码方式表格，如果系统支持的调制编码方式表格的数量为多个，那么DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格就是这多个调制编码方式表格中的至少一个。例如，一个调制编码方式表格对应一个误块率，在系统支持的每个调制编码方式表格中，包括了至少一种调制编码方式信息。那么，第一信息可以直接包括DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格，终端设备根据DCI可确定应使用哪个调制编码方式表格，再结合调制编码方式索引，就可以在该调制编码方式表格中确定相应的调制编码方式信息，方式较为简单直接。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值为多个调制编码方式索引偏移值中的至少一个，所述多个调制编码方式索引偏移值包括第一调制编码方式索引偏移值和第二调制编码方式索引偏移值，所述第一调制编码方式索引偏移值对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二调制编码方式索引偏移值对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
终端设备根据DCI指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，以及确定的调制编码方式索引， 就可以确定DCI所指示的该调制编码方式表格中的调制编码方式信息。具体的，终端设备可以在确定的调制编码方式索引的基础上再加上该调制编码方式索引偏移值(或者减去调制编码方式索引偏移值)，得到该调制编码方式表格中的一个调制编码方式索引，而这个调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息就是要确定的调制编码方式信息。这种方式同样简单直接，可实现性较强。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔，所述反馈时间间隔为从发送第二信息包含的数据到所述终端设备发送所述数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息之间的时间间隔，或，为从调度所述第二信息的DCI到所述终端设备发送所述第二信息之间的时间间隔，所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔属于多个时间间隔集合中的至少一个，所述多个时间间隔集合包括第一时间间隔集合和第二时间间隔集合，所述第一时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
一般来说，反馈时间间隔越短，表明需求越紧急，这样的业务可能就是URLLC业务，或者是其他较为紧急的业务，那么对于这样的业务，就可以采用误块率较低的调制编码方式信息，以保证可靠性。而如反馈时间间隔较长，表明需求不是很紧急，这样的业务对于可靠性的要求一般不是很高，则对于这样的业务，就可以采用误块率较高的调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或所述DCI中所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，还包括所述DCI的格式，所述DCI的格式为第一DCI格式，所述DCI包括第一比特信息域和第二比特信息域；所述确定第一信息，包括：根据所述第一比特信息域，确定所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，其中，所述第一比特信息域的比特数大于或等于1，所述第二比特信息域包括以下的一种：所述第二比特信息域的比特数小于或等于2，所述第二比特信息域用于指示从所述第二信息到HARQ应答信息的反馈时间；所述第二比特信息域的比特数小于或等于3，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述第二信息占用的时域资源；所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于1，所述第二比特信息域用于指示冗余版本，所述冗余版本版为0或3；所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于1，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述终端设备的发送功率命令字，所述发送功率命令字为0或3；和，所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于4，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述调制编码方式索引。
例如，DCI的格式可以包括第一DCI格式和第二DCI格式，第一DCI格式的DCI可称为简洁的(compact)DCI，第二DCI格式的DCI可称为回退(fallback)DCI。可以理解为，第一DCI格式的DCI是适用于URLLC业务的DCI。第二DCI格式的DCI是适用于所有业务的DCI，例如DCI format 0_0和DCI format 1_0。本申请实施例提供的技术方案可应用在第一DCI格式的DCI中。可以理解的是，本申请实施例中认为第一DCI格式的DCI的总比特数与第二DCI格式的DCI的总比特数可以设置成相同，这样可以减少盲检测次数，为终端设备省电。那么在第一DCI格式的DCI中，第二比特信息域可以继续完成第二比特信息域原有的功能，第一比特信息域可以用于确定第一信息，相当于利用了DCI中已有的比特信息域来完成对第一信息的确定，无需再利用额外的资源来确定第一信息，有助于节省传输资源，也提高了DCI资源的利用率。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的A-CSI，所述DCI所指示的A-CSI为多个A-CSI中的至少一个，所述多个A-CSI包括第一CSI和第二CSI，所述第一CSI对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二CSI对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息；和/或，所述DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI对应于多个误块率，所述多个误块率包括最高误块率和最低误块率；所述最高误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述最低误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息，或，所述最低误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述最高误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
第一CSI和第二CSI可以是内容不同的CSI，例如，若DCI指示的A-CSI包括缓慢变化的信息，例如RI和/或RSRP，表明CSI可能是不太紧急的业务，则需要误块率较高的调制编码方式表格。若DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI包括快速的信息，例如CQI和/或PMI，表明CSI可能是比较紧急的业务，则需要误块率较低的调制编码方式表格。又例如，若DCI指示的A-CSI包括CSI part 2，表明CSI可能是不太紧急的业务，则需要误块率较高的调制编码方式表格。若DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI仅包括CSI part 1，表明CSI可能是比较紧急的业务，则需要误块率较低的调制编码方式表格。需要说明的是，这里调制编码方式表格和误块率的对应并不限定，即误块率与调制编码方式表格的对应方式可以是预先定义或高层信令配置的。或者，第一CSI和第二CSI可以是比特信息数(或称为比特数)不同的CSI，那么例如，若DCI指示的A-CSI包括的比特信息数大于或等于第一比特数，表明CSI可能是不太紧急的业务，则需要误块率较高的调制编码方式表格。若DCI指示的A-CSI包括的比特信息数小于第二比特数，表明CSI可能是比较紧急的业务，则需要误块率较低的调制编码方式表格。
或者，可以事先规定最高误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，最低误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息，或，最低误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，最高误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息，具体的规定不作限制。
在一个可能的设计中，所述确定第一信息包括：根据在第一时间窗内接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，确定所述第一信息，所述第一信息包括以下至少一项：在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数；在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数；在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值；和，在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值。
本申请实施例中，第一时间窗可以通过协议规定，或者也可以由网络设备配置，并通过高层信令或动态信令通知终端设备。
第一时间窗例如为：以接收承载MCS信息的DCI的时刻为终止时刻的单位时间，以确定MCS信息的时刻为终止时刻的单位时间，或者，以接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻为 起始时刻，以在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后接收的第一个第一否定应答信息的时刻为终止时刻，或者，以接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻为起始时刻，以在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后第一次未接收第一HARQ应答信息的时刻为终止时刻，或者，以接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻为起始时刻，以在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后的预设时长的结束时刻为终止时刻。这里的第一肯定应答信息，可以是传输过程中的任意一个第一肯定应答信息，或者，以一个时间单元所在的起始时刻和终止时刻。
理论上来讲，终端设备每发送一个数据(或传输块)，就会从网络设备接收第一HARQ应答信息，那么终端设备可以根据在第一时间窗内接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的情况来确定第一信息，无需再借助其他额外的信息确定第一信息，网络设备也无需再发送额外的信息，有助于节省传输资源。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于多个次数集合中的至少一个，所述多个次数集合包括第一次数集合和第二次数集合，所述第一次数集合包括的在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二次数集合包括的在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
接收第一否定应答信息，表明网络设备接收错误，或者表明终端设备的上行数据传输错误，而未接收第一否定应答信息，很可能也是表明网络设备接收错误，或者可能表明终端设备的上行数据传输错误。如果接收第一否定应答信息和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数较多，说明网络设备一直接收错误，由于距离业务传输结束的时间越来越近，例如选择使用低误块率对应的调制编码方式表格。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数属于多个次数集合中的至少一个，所述多个次数集合包括第三次数集合和第四次数集合，所述第三次数集合包括的在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第四次数集合包括的在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
接收第一肯定应答信息，表明网络设备接收正确，或者表明终端设备的上行数据传输正确。如果接收第一肯定应答信息的次数较少，说明网络设备一直接收错误，由于距离业务传输结束的时间越来越近，例如选择使用低误块率对应的调制编码方式表格。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于多个比值集合中的至少一个，所述多个比值集合包括第一比值集合和第二比值集合，所述第一比值集合包括的在所述第一时 间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二比值集合包括的在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
接收第一否定应答信息，表明网络设备接收错误，或者表明终端设备的上行数据传输错误，而未接收第一否定应答信息，很可能也是表明网络设备接收错误，或者可能表明终端设备的上行数据传输错误。如果接收第一否定应答信息和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值较大，说明网络设备一直接收错误，由于距离业务传输结束的时间越来越近，例如选择使用低误块率对应的调制编码方式表格。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于多个比值集合中的至少一个，所述多个比值集合包括第三比值集合和第四比值集合，所述第三比值集合包括的在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第四比值集合包括的在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
接收第一肯定应答信息，表明网络设备接收正确，或者表明终端设备的上行数据传输正确。如果接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值较小，说明网络设备一直接收错误，由于距离业务传输结束的时间越来越近，例如选择使用低误块率对应的调制编码方式表格。
第二方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法可由通信设备执行，该通信设备例如为网络设备，例如基站。该方法包括：确定调制编码方式信息；确定第一信息和调制编码方式索引，所述第一信息和所述调制编码方式索引用于指示所述调制编码方式信息；通过下行控制信息DCI发送所述第一信息。
网络设备可以通过DCI来发送第一信息，使得终端设备通过DCI就能确定第一信息，终端设备再根据第一信息就可以确定调制编码方式索引所对应的调制编码方式信息，从而终端设备可根据确定的调制编码方式信息对第二信息进行调制或解调等处理，而第一信息可以是采用动态方式通知给终端设备的，例如根据DCI确定第一信息，无需借助于半静态的高层信令来通知，从而能够满足URLLC业务的需求，使得向终端设备通知调制编码方式信息的方式更能适配URLLC业务的需求。
另外，如果终端设备采用其他方式确定第一信息，例如终端设备根据在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的情况来确定第一信息，则网络设备也可以采用相应的方式来确定第一信息，例如网络设备根据在第一时间窗内发送第一HARQ应答信息的情况来确定第一信息，在这种情况下，网络设备可以无需通过DCI来发送第一信息，更为节省传输资源。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括以下至少一种：调制编码方式表格；调制编码方式索引偏移值；反馈时间间隔；和，A-CSI。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述调制编码方式表格，所述调制编码方式表格为多个调制编码方式表格中的至少一个，所述多个调制编码方式表格包括第一调制编码方式表格和第二调制编码方式表格，所述第一调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述调制编码方式索引偏移值，所述调制编码方式索引偏移值为多个调制编码方式索引偏移值中的至少一个，所述多个调制编码方式索引偏移值包括第一调制编码方式索引偏移值和第二调制编码方式索引偏移值，所述第一调制编码方式索引值对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二调制编码方式索引值对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述反馈时间间隔，所述反馈时间间隔为从发送第二信息包含的数据到所述终端设备发送所述数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息之间的时间间隔，或，为从调度所述第二信息的DCI到所述终端设备发送所述第二信息之间的时间间隔，所述反馈时间间隔属于多个时间间隔集合中的至少一个，所述多个时间间隔集合包括第一时间间隔集合和第二时间间隔集合，所述第一时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述调制编码方式表格和/或所述调制编码方式索引偏移值，还包括所述DCI的格式，所述DCI的格式为第一DCI格式，所述DCI包括第一比特信息域和第二比特信息域；所述第一比特信息域用于指示确定所述调制编码方式表格和/或所述调制编码方式索引偏移值，其中，所述第一比特信息域的比特数大于或等于1，所述第二比特信息域包括以下的一种：所述第二比特信息域的比特数小于或等于2，所述第二比特信息域用于指示从所述第二信息到HARQ应答信息的反馈时间；所述第二比特信息域的比特数小于或等于3，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述第二信息占用的时域资源；所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于1，所述第二比特信息域用于指示冗余版本，所述冗余版本版为0或3；所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于1，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述终端设备的发送功率命令字，所述发送功率命令字为0或3；和，所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于4，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述调制编码方式索引。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述A-CSI，所述A-CSI为多个A-CSI中的至少一个，所述多个A-CSI包括第一CSI和第二CSI，所述第一CSI对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二CSI对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息；和/或，所述A-CSI包括的CSI对应于多个误块率，所述多个误块率包括最高误块率和最低误块率；所述最高误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述最低误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息，或，所述最低误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为 第一调制编码方式信息，所述最高误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括以下至少一种：所述DCI所在的搜索空间；所述DCI所在的载波；所述DCI的检测周期；所述DCI的CCE聚合等级；和，所述DCI所在的CORSET。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所在的搜索空间，所述DCI所在的搜索空间为多个搜索空间中的至少一个，所述多个搜索空间包括公共搜索空间和用户专用搜索空间，所述公共搜索空间对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述用户专用搜索空间对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息。
公共搜索空间的出现频率一般较低，而用户专用搜索空间的出现频率一般较高。因此，公共搜索空间更适合误块率较高的调制编码方式信息，而用户专用搜索空间更适合误块率较低的调制编码方式信息，从该角度考虑，则第二调制编码方式信息对应的误块率可以小于第一调制编码方式信息对应的误块率。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所在的载波，所述DCI所在的载波为多个载波中的至少一个，所述多个载波包括第一载波和第二载波，所述第一载波对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二载波对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
例如，系统可能会将URLLC业务承载在特定的载波上传输，将其他业务承载在其他载波上传输，那么如果终端设备通过承载URLLC业务的载波接收DCI，则表明DCI所调度的第二信息属于URLLC业务，URLLC业务需要较高的可靠性，则就可以选用误块率较低的调制编码方式信息，而如果终端设备通过承载其他业务的载波接收DCI，则表明DCI所调度的第二信息属于除URLLC业务外的其他业务，其他业务的可靠性要求没有URLLC业务高，则就可以选用误块率较高的调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括DCI的检测周期，所述DCI的检测周期属于多个检测周期集合中的至少一个，所述多个检测周期集合包括第一检测周期集合和第二检测周期集合，所述第一检测周期集合对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二检测周期集合对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
例如，DCI的检测周期越短，表明需求越紧急，这样的业务可能就是URLLC业务，或者是其他较为紧急的业务，对于这样的业务，就可以采用误块率较低的调制编码方式信息，以保证可靠性。而如果DCI的检测周期较长，表明需求不是很紧急，这样的业务对于可靠性的要求一般不是很高，则对于这样的业务，就可以采用误块率较高的调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI的CCE聚合等级，所述DCI的CCE聚合等级属于多个聚合等级集合中的至少一个，所述多个聚合等级集合包括第一聚合等级集合和第二聚合等级集合，所述第一聚合等级集合对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二聚合等级集合对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
例如，在高聚合等级下，终端设备能收到DCI的概率更高，那么这时很可能该终端设 备的可靠性要求较高，则可以采用误块率较低的调制编码方式信息，以保证可靠性。反之，在低聚合等级下，终端设备可能都没有收到DCI，所以此时该终端设备的可靠性要求不是很高，则可以采用误块率较高的调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所在的CORSET，所述DCI所在的CORSET属于多个CORSET集合中的至少一个，所述多个CORSET集合包括第一CORSET集合和第二CORSET集合，所述第一CORSET集合对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二CORSET集合对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一CORSET集合中对应的REG绑定大小属于第一REG绑定大小集合，和/或，所述第二CORSET集合中对应的REG绑定大小属于第二REG绑定大小集合。
在高REG绑定大小下，终端设备能收到DCI的概率更高，那么这时很可能该终端设备的可靠性要求较高，则可以采用误块率较低的调制编码方式信息，以保证可靠性。反之，在低REG绑定大小下，终端设备可能都没有收到DCI，所以此时该终端设备的可靠性要求不是很高，则可以采用误块率较高的调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述DCI用于指示第二信息的时域资源和/或频域资源，所述确定第一信息，包括：根据所述第二信息所在的资源，确定所述第一信息，所述第一信息包括以下至少一项：所述第二信息所在的资源所在的载波；所述第二信息所在的资源所在的小区；所述第二信息所在的资源所在的BWP；所述第二信息所在的资源所在的TAG；所述第二信息所在的资源所在的PUCCH group；所述第二信息所在的资源对应的PUCCH格式；所述第二信息所在的资源的子载波间隔；所述第二信息所在的资源所在的波形；和，所述第二信息所在的资源的时域长度。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述第二信息所在的资源所在的载波，所述第二信息所在的资源所在的载波为多个载波中的至少一个，所述多个载波包括第一载波和第二载波，所述第一载波对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二载波对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
例如，系统可能会将URLLC业务承载在特定的载波上传输，将其他业务承载在其他载波上传输，那么如果通过承载URLLC业务的载波传输第二信息，则表明第二信息属于URLLC业务，URLLC业务需要较高的可靠性，则就可以选用误块率较低的调制编码方式信息，而如果通过承载其他业务的载波传输第二信息，则表明第二信息属于除URLLC业务外的其他业务，其他业务的可靠性要求没有URLLC业务高，则就可以选用误块率较高的调制编码方式信息。
对于第一信息包括第二信息所在的资源所在的小区、第二信息所在的资源所在的BWP、第二信息所在的资源所在的TAG、第二信息所在的资源所在的PUCCH group、第二信息所在的资源对应的PUCCH格式、第二信息所在的资源的子载波间隔、第二信息所在的资源所在的波形中的至少一项时，与第一信息包括第二信息所在的资源所在的载波类似，不多赘述。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括所述第二信息所在的资源的时域长度，所述第二信息所在的资源的时域长度属于多个时域长度集合中的至少一个，所述多个时域长度 集合包括第一时域长度集合和第二时域长度集合，所述第一时域长度集合包括的所述第二信息所在的资源的时域长度对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二时域长度集合包括的所述第二信息所在的资源的时域长度对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
在第二信息所在的资源的时域长度较小的情况下，表明第二信息可能是比较紧急的业务，或者说留给第二信息的传输时间较短，则需要误块率较低的调制编码方式信息，从而尽量保证第二信息能够在较短的时间内传输成功，而在第二信息所在的资源的时域长度较大的情况下，表明第二信息可能是不太紧急的业务，或者说留给第二信息的传输时间较多，则就可以使用误块率较高的调制编码方式信息。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第二调制编码方式信息对应的误块率小于所述第一调制编码方式信息对应的误块率；或，所述第二调制编码方式信息对应的误块率的优先级高于所述第一调制编码方式信息对应的误块率的优先级。
或者，在一个可能的设计中，所述第二调制编码方式信息对应的误块率大于所述第一调制编码方式信息对应的误块率；或，所述第二调制编码方式信息对应的误块率的优先级低于所述第一调制编码方式信息对应的误块率的优先级。
具体的，第一调制编码方式信息对应的误块率和第二调制编码方式信息对应的误块率之间的关系，本申请实施例不作限制。
在一个可能的设计中，所述第二调制编码方式信息与所述第一调制编码方式信息相同，或，所述第二调制编码方式信息与所述第一调制编码方式信息不同。
第三方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法可由通信设备执行，该通信设备例如为终端设备。该方法包括：确定调制编码方式索引，所述调制编码方式索引为N个调制编码索引中的一个，所述N个调制编码方式索引为从0～N-1，所述N个调制编码方式索引满足以下至少一种：从调制编码方式索引X到调制编码方式索引Y对应第一误块率，从索引Y+1到索引Z对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝X<＝Y<Z<＝N-1，N为大于1的整数；以及，从调制编码方式索引A到调制编码方式索引B对应第一误块率，调制编码方式索引C对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝A<C<B<＝N-1，N为大于2的整数；确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息，所述调制编码方式信息包括调制方式、编码码率和误块率，其中所述误块率为至少两个误块率中的一个，所述至少两个误块率包括所述第一误块率和所述第二误块率。在一个可能的设计中，所述A，B，和C为整数，所述X，Y，和Z为整数。
相应的，第四方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法可由通信设备执行，该通信设备例如为网络设备，例如基站。该方法包括：确定调制编码方式信息，所述调制编码方式信息包括调制方式、编码码率和误块率，其中所述误块率为至少两个误块率中的一个，所述至少两个误块率包括所述第一误块率和所述第二误块率；确定所述调制编码方式信息对应的调制编码方式索引，所述调制编码方式索引为N个调制编码索引中的一个，所述N个调制编码方式索引为从0～N-1，所述N个调制编码方式索引满足以下至少一种：从调制编码方式索引X到调制编码方式索引Y对应第一误块率，从索引Y+1到索引Z对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝X<＝Y<Z<＝N-1，N为大于1的整数；以及，从调制编码方式索引A到调制编码方式索引B对应第一误块率，调制编码方式索引C对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝A<C<B<＝N-1，N为大于2的整数。在一个可能的设计中，所述A，B，和C为整数，所述X，Y，和Z为整数。
本申请实施例可以重新提供MCS表格，则终端设备只需确定MCS索引就可以直接在该MCS表格中确定MCS信息，方式较为简单，易于实现。
第五方面，提供一种通信设备，该通信设备例如为终端设备。该终端设备具有实现上述方法设计中的终端设备的功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。
在一个可能的设计中，该终端设备的具体结构可包括处理器和收发器。处理器和收发器可执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的设计所提供的方法中的相应功能。
第六方面，提供一种通信设备，该通信设备例如为网络设备。该网络设备具有实现上述方法设计中的网络设备的功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。
在一个可能的设计中，该网络设备的具体结构可包括处理器和收发器。处理器和收发器可执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的设计所提供的方法中的相应功能。
第七方面，提供一种通信设备，该通信设备例如为终端设备。该终端设备具有实现上述方法设计中的终端设备的功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。
在一个可能的设计中，该终端设备的具体结构可包括处理器和收发器。处理器和收发器可执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的设计所提供的方法中的相应功能。
第八方面，提供一种通信设备，该通信设备例如为网络设备。该网络设备具有实现上述方法设计中的网络设备的功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。
在一个可能的设计中，该网络设备的具体结构可包括处理器和收发器。处理器和收发器可执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的设计所提供的方法中的相应功能。
第九方面，提供一种通信设备，该通信设备例如为终端设备。该终端设备具有实现上述方法设计中的终端设备的功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。
在一个可能的设计中，该终端设备的具体结构可包括处理模块和收发模块。处理模块和收发模块可执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的设计所提供的方法中的相应功能。
第十方面，提供一种通信设备，该通信设备例如为网络设备。该网络设备具有实现上述方法设计中的网络设备的功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。
在一个可能的设计中，该网络设备的具体结构可包括处理模块和收发模块。处理模块和收发模块可执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的设计所提供的方法中的相应功能。
第十一方面，提供一种通信设备，该通信设备例如为终端设备。该终端设备具有实现上述方法设计中的终端设备的功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。
在一个可能的设计中，该终端设备的具体结构可包括处理模块和收发模块。处理模块和收发模块可执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的设计所提供的方法中的相应功能。
第十二方面，提供一种通信设备，该通信设备例如为网络设备。该网络设备具有实现上述方法设计中的网络设备的功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。
在一个可能的设计中，该网络设备的具体结构可包括处理模块和收发模块。处理模块和收发模块可执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的设计所提供的方法中的相应功能。
第十三方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为上述方法设计中的终端设备，或者为设置在终端设备中的芯片。该通信装置包括：存储器，用于存储计算机可执行程序代码；以及处理器，处理器与存储器耦合。其中存储器所存储的程序代码包括指令，当处理器执行所述指令时，使通信装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的设计中终端设备所执行的方法。
第十四方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为上述方法设计中的网络设备，或者为设置在网络设备中的芯片。该通信装置包括：存储器，用于存储计算机可执行程序代码；以及处理器，处理器与存储器耦合。其中存储器所存储的程序代码包括指令，当处理器执行所述指令时，使通信装置执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的设计中网络设备所执行的方法。
第十五方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为上述方法设计中的终端设备，或者为设置在终端设备中的芯片。该通信装置包括：存储器，用于存储计算机可执行程序代码；以及处理器，处理器与存储器耦合。其中存储器所存储的程序代码包括指令，当处理器执行所述指令时，使通信装置执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的设计中终端设备所执行的方法。
第十六方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为上述方法设计中的网络设备，或者为设置在网络设备中的芯片。该通信装置包括：存储器，用于存储计算机可执行程序代码；以及处理器，处理器与存储器耦合。其中存储器所存储的程序代码包括指令，当处理器执行所述指令时，使通信装置执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的设计中网络设备所执行的方法。
第十七方面，提供一种通信系统，该通信系统包括网络设备和终端设备。其中，终端设备，用于确定调制编码方式索引；确定第一信息；根据所述第一信息，确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息；其中，所述确定第一信息包括：根据接收的DCI，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，确定所述第一信息，所述第一HARQ应答信息为第一肯定应答信息或第一否定应答信息；网络设备，用于确定调制编码方式信息；确定第一信息和调制编码方式索引，所述第一信息和所述调制编码方式索引用于指示所述调制编码方式信息；通过下行控制信息DCI发送所述第一信息。
第十八方面，提供一种通信系统，该通信系统包括网络设备和终端设备。其中，终端设备，用于确定调制编码方式索引，所述调制编码方式索引为N个调制编码索引中的一个，所述N个调制编码方式索引为从0～N-1，所述N个调制编码方式索引满足以下至少一种：从调制编码方式索引X到调制编码方式索引Y对应第一误块率，从索引Y+1到索引Z对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝X<＝Y<Z<＝N-1，N为大于1的整数；以及，从调制编码方式索引A到调制编码方式索引B对应第一误块率，调制编码方式索引C对应第二误块率， 其中，0<＝A<C<B<＝N-1，N为大于2的整数；确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息，所述调制编码方式信息包括调制方式、编码码率和误块率，其中所述误块率为至少两个误块率中的一个，所述至少两个误块率包括所述第一误块率和所述第二误块率；网络设备，用于确定调制编码方式信息，所述调制编码方式信息包括调制方式、编码码率和误块率，其中所述误块率为至少两个误块率中的一个，所述至少两个误块率包括所述第一误块率和所述第二误块率；确定所述调制编码方式信息对应的调制编码方式索引，所述调制编码方式索引为N个调制编码索引中的一个，所述N个调制编码方式索引为从0～N-1，所述N个调制编码方式索引满足以下至少一种：从调制编码方式索引X到调制编码方式索引Y对应第一误块率，从索引Y+1到索引Z对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝X<＝Y<Z<＝N-1，N为大于1的整数；以及，从调制编码方式索引A到调制编码方式索引B对应第一误块率，调制编码方式索引C对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝A<C<B<＝N-1，N为大于2的整数。在一个可能的设计中，所述A，B，和C为整数，所述X，Y，和Z为整数。
第十九方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
第二十方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
第二十一方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
第二十二方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
第二十三方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
第二十四方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
第二十五方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
第二十六方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
本申请实施例中，第一信息可以是采用动态方式通知给终端设备的，例如根据DCI确定第一信息、或第一接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数等确定第一信息，都是采用动态方式确定第一信息，无需借助于半静态的高层信令来通知，从而能够满足URLLC业务的需求， 使得向终端设备通知调制编码方式信息的方式更能适配URLLC业务的需求。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例的一种应用场景示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信方法的流程图；
图3为本申请实施例中一次URLLC业务传输过程的时间要求示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的第二种通信方法的流程图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的终端设备的一种结构示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的一种结构示意图；
图7为本申请实施例提供的终端设备的一种结构示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的一种结构示意图；
图9A-图9B为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的两种结构示意图。
具体实施方式
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。
以下，对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明，以便于本领域技术人员理解。
1)终端设备，包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备，例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)与核心网进行通信，与RAN交换语音和/或数据。该终端设备可以包括用户设备(user equipment，UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station)，移动站(mobile station)、移动台(mobile)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point，AP)、远程终端设备(remote terminal)、接入终端设备(access terminal)、用户终端设备(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。例如，可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)，具有移动终端设备的计算机，便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置，智能穿戴式设备等。例如，个人通信业务(personal communication service，PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、等设备。还包括受限设备，例如功耗较低的设备，或存储能力有限的设备，或计算能力有限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification，RFID)、传感器、全球定位系统(global positioning system，GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。
作为示例而非限定，在本申请实施例中，该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上，或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备，更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能，例如：智能手表或智能眼镜 等，以及只专注于某一类应用功能，需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用，如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。
2)网络设备，例如包括基站(例如，接入点)，可以是指接入网中在空中接口上通过一个或多个小区与无线终端设备通信的设备。网络设备可用于将收到的空中帧与网际协议(IP)分组进行相互转换，作为终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器，其中接入网的其余部分可包括IP网络。网络设备还可协调对空中接口的属性管理。例如，网络设备可以包括长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统或演进的LTE系统(LTE-Advanced，LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB，evolutional Node B)，或者也可以包括5G NR系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B，gNB)，本申请实施例并不限定。
另外，在本申请实施例中，网络设备为小区提供服务，终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如，频域资源，或者说，频谱资源)与网络设备进行通信，该小区可以是网络设备(例如基站)对应的小区，小区可以属于宏基站，也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站，这里的小小区可以包括：城市小区(Metro cell)、微小区(Micro cell)、微微小区(Pico cell)、毫微微小区(Femto cell)等，这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点，适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。
此外，LTE系统或NR系统中的载波上可以同时有多个小区同频工作，在某些特殊场景下，也可以认为上述载波与小区的概念等同。例如在载波聚合(carrier aggregation，CA)场景下，当为UE配置辅载波时，会同时携带辅载波的载波索引和工作在该辅载波的辅小区的小区标识(cell indentify，Cell ID)，在这种情况下，可以认为载波与小区的概念等同，比如UE接入一个载波和接入一个小区是等同的。
3)子载波间隔，正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)系统中，频域上相邻的两个子载波的中心位置或峰值位置之间的间隔值。例如，长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统中的子载波间隔为15(kilohertz，kHz)，5G NR系统的子载波间隔可以是15kHz，或30kHz，或60kHz，或120kHz等。
可参考如下的表1：
表1
Figure PCTCN2019070510-appb-000001
其中，μ用于指示子载波间隔，例如，μ＝0时，子载波间隔为15kHz，μ＝1时，子载波间隔为30kHz。
4)URLLC业务，URLLC业务对时延要求极高，从发送端到接收端的单向传输时延要求在0.5ms以内，并且在1ms以内在达到99.999％的传输可靠性。
为了满足URLLC业务的传输时延需求，无线空口的数据传输可以使用更短的时间调 度单元，例如，使用迷你时隙(mini-slot)，或使用更大的子载波间隔的时隙作为最小的时间调度单元。其中，一个mini-slot包括一个或多个时域符号，这里的时域符号可以是正交频分复用OFDM符号。对于子载波间隔为15kHz的一个时隙，包括6个或7个时域符号，对应的时间长度为0.5ms；对于子载波间隔为60kHz的一个时隙，对应的时间长度则缩短为0.125ms。
URLLC业务的数据包的产生具有突发性和随机性，可能在很长一段时间内都不会产生数据包，也可能在很短时间内产生多个数据包。URLLC业务的数据包在多数情况下为小包，例如50个字节。URLLC业务的数据包的特性会影响通信系统的资源分配方式。这里的资源包括但不限于：时域符号、频域资源、时频资源、码字资源以及波束资源等。通常系统资源的分配由接入网设备来完成，下面以接入网设备为例进行说明。如果接入网设备采用预留资源的方式为URLLC业务分配资源，则在无URLLC业务的时候系统资源是浪费的。而且URLLC业务的短时延特性要求数据包在极短的时间内传输完成，所以接入网设备需要预留足够大的带宽给URLLC业务，从而导致系统资源利用率严重下降。
URLLC业务数据通常采用较短的时间调度单元，以满足超短时延的需求，例如，采用15kHz子载波间隔的2个时域符号，或者采用60kHz子载波间隔的一个时隙，对应7个时域符号，对应的时间长度为0.125ms。
5)调制编码方式表格，在本文中，可将调制编码方式简称为MCS，那么在本文中，调制编码方式表格可简称为MCS表格。但本文不限制调制编码方式会有其他的翻译方式。MCS表格中包括以下至少一种内容：调制方式(modulation)、编码率(coding rate)和BLER等。一个MCS表格中可包括至少一种调制编码方式信息，每种调制编码方式信息都有对应的索引(即，调制编码方式索引)，以及又对应以下至少一种内容：调制方式、编码率和BLER。同理，因本文将调制编码方式简称为MCS，则也可以将调制编码方式信息简称为MCS信息，以及，可以将调制编码方式索引简称为MCS索引。
对于URLLC业务来说，可能支持多个MCS表格，其中的每个MCS表格可能对应一个BLER或多个BLER。在本文的介绍过程中，主要以2个MCS表格为例，在实际应用中，MCS表格的数量不限于此。
6)信道状态信息(channel state information，CSI)，一般而言，CSI又分为周期CSI(P-CSI)、非周期CSI(A-CSI)和半持续CSI(SPS-CSI)。周期CSI的含义是终端设备周期性地向网络设备发送CSI，非周期CSI的发送是网络设备通过下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)来触发的发送一次，而半持续CSI的发送网络设备通过下行控制信息来触发终端设备持续发送CSI一段时间。从发送机制上可以看出，非周期CSI可以使得网络设备根据自身需要来指示终端设备发送此时的CSI，从而更加灵活。但每次触发都依赖于DCI的发送，为了控制DCI的数量，减少DCI占用的控制信道资源又引入了半持续CSI，而周期CSI是高层信令配置的所以最节省DCI的发送，从而三种机制都被保留了下来。需要注意的是，在第四代移动通信系统(the forth generation，4G)系统中仅支持周期CSI和非周期CSI，非周期CSI一定是在物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)中发送，周期CSI一定是在物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)中发送。而在目前5G NR系统的讨论中，引入了半持续CSI，并且也同意了在PUCCH中可以发送非周期CSI。其中，CSI包括信道状态指示(channel quality indicator，CQI)、预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicators，PMI)、秩指示(rank indicator， RI)、参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power，RSRP)、信道状态信息参考信号资源指示(channel-state Information reference signal resource indicator，CRI)、非零宽带加权系数的数量指示(indicator of the number of non-zero wideband amplitude coefficients)等信息中的一个或者多个。
7)带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)，是指信道带宽中的一部分，也可以叫做“工作带宽(operating bandwidth)”或者传输带宽，迷你BWP(mini BWP)、BWP单元(BWP Unit)、BP子带等，可以简称为BWP，也可以简称为BP，本申请实施例中不对带宽部分的名称以及简称进行具体限定。BWP可以是频域上的一段连续的资源。例如，一个带宽部分包含连续的K(K>0)个子载波；或者，一个带宽部分为N(N>0)个不重叠的连续的资源块(resource block，RB)所在的频域资源；或者，一个带宽部分为M(M>0)个不重叠的连续的资源块组(resource block group，RBG)所在的频域资源，其中一个RBG包括P(P>0)个连续的RB。一个带宽部分与一个特定的系统参数(numerology)相关，所述系统参数包括子载波间隔和循环前缀(cyclic prefix，CP)中的至少一种。
8)误块率，在本文中简称为BLER，但不排除会有其他翻译方式或会有其他名称。BLER是出错的块在发送的所有块中所占的百分比。例如，BLER可以等于{x*10e-1，x*10e-2，x*10e-3，x*10e-4，x*10e-5，x*10e-6，x*10e-7，x*10e-8，x*10e-9}中的一个，或者还可以等于其他取值。其中，10e-1＝10 -1＝0.1，BLER的其他取值也是类似。其中x为正数，例如x＝1或5，还可以等于其他取值。即，可以理解的，BLER也可以替换为正确率，可以等于{1-x*1e-1，1-x*1e-2，1-x*1e-3，1-x*1e-4，1-x*1e-5，1-x*1e-6，1-x*1e-7，1-x*1e-8或1-x*1e-9}中的一个。
9)高层信令，可以是指高层协议层发出的信令，高层协议层为物理层以上的至少一个协议层。其中，高层协议层具体可以包括以下协议层中的至少一个：媒体接入控制(medium access control，MAC)层、无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层、分组数据会聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层、无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)层和非接入层(non access stratum，NAS)。
动态信令，可以是指物理层发出的信令，例如通过DCI发送的信令或信息。
10)关于波形，本文会涉及DCI的波形，或者第二信息所在的资源的波形等。目前，5G NR系统在上行支持两种波形，一种为OFDM，一种为单载波频分复用多址接入(single carrier frequency division m3ultiplexing access，SC-FDMA)，5G NR系统下行支持OFDM。
11)时间调整组(timing advance group，TAG)，一个TAG里可能包括一个载波或者多个载波，或者包括一个BWP或多个BWP。
12)PUCCH group，一个PUCCH group可以包括一个TAG或者多个TAG，也可以包括一个载波或者多个载波。
13)本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“多个”是指两个或两个以上，鉴于此，本申请实施例中也可以将“多个”理解为“至少两个”。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，字符“/”，如无特殊说明，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
以及，除非有相反的说明，本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分，不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。
本申请实施例可以适用于LTE系统或5G NR系统，还可以适用于下一代移动通信系统或其他类似的通信系统。
另外，在下文的介绍过程中，主要以将本申请实施例提供的技术方案应用于URLLC业务为例，在实际应用中不限于此，例如本申请实施例提供的技术方案也可应用于其他的具有与URLLC业务类似要求的业务。
请参见图1，为本申请实施例的一种应用场景。在图1中包括网络设备以及至少一个终端设备，网络设备和终端设备工作在5G NR系统中，网络设备例如为基站。其中，终端设备与网络设备可以通过5G NR系统进行通信。
在后文中，会涉及两个概念，第一MCS信息和第二MCS信息。其中，第一MCS信息和第二MCS信息可满足：
第二MCS信息对应的BLER小于第一MCS信息对应的BLER，例如第二MCS信息对应的BLER为10e-5，第一MCS对应的BLER为10e-3；或，
第二MCS信息对应的BLER的优先级高于第一MCS信息对应的BLER的优先级。
或者，第一MCS信息和第二MCS信息可满足：
第二MCS信息对应的BLER大于第一MCS信息对应的BLER，例如第一MCS信息对应的BLER为10e-5，第二MCS对应的BLER为10e-3；或，
第二MCS信息对应的BLER的优先级低于第一MCS信息对应的BLER的优先级。
在后文的介绍中，主要以第二MCS信息对应的BLER小于第一MCS信息对应的BLER，或第二MCS信息对应的BLER的优先级高于第一MCS信息对应的BLER的优先级为例，但本申请实施例不限制第一MCS信息对应的BLER和第二MCS信息对应的BLER之间的大小关系，也不限制第一MCS信息对应的BLER的优先级和第二MCS信息对应的BLER的优先级之间的关系。
另外，本文也不限制BLER的取值和BLER的优先级之间的关系。例如一种可能性为，BLER的取值越小则优先级越高，则取值为10e-5的BLER的优先级高于取值为10e-3的BLER的优先级，或者另一种可能性为，BLER的取值越大则优先级越高，则取值为10e-3的BLER的优先级高于取值为10e-5的BLER的优先级。或者一种可能性，BLER的优先级由网络设备通过高层信令或物理层信令通知。
请参见图2，本申请实施例提供第一种通信方法，在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用在图1所示的应用场景为例。该方法的流程介绍如下。
S21、终端设备向网络设备发送CSI，则网络设备从终端设备接收该CSI；
S22、网络设备确定第一信息，或确定第一信息和调制编码方式索引；
S23、网络设备向终端设备发送调制编码方式索引，则终端设备接收该调制编码方式索引；
S24、终端设备确定调制编码方式索引；
S25、终端设备确定第一信息，其中，确定第一信息包括：根据接收的DCI确定第一信息，和/或，根据在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数确定第一信息，第一HARQ应答信息为第一肯定应答信息或第一否定应答信息；
S26、终端设备根据第一信息，确定调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息；
S27、终端设备根据确定的调制编码方式信息传输第二信息。
本申请实施例中，步骤之前的编号只是一种示例，并不是对步骤的实际执行顺序的限制，在应用过程中，各步骤也可以根据不同的场景或需求等改变执行顺序。
终端设备通过对CSI参考资源的信道测量得到CSI报告(report)，终端设备将对CSI报告进行编码后得到的CSI发送给网络设备，则网络设备就可以从终端设备接收该CSI。
其中，S21是可选的步骤，因为网络设备也可以在未从终端设备接收CSI的情况下对终端设备发送调制编码方式索引或进行调度第二信息。
另外，本申请实施例中，网络设备可以向终端设备发送MCS索引(index)，那么网络设备可以在S22中确定第一信息和MCS索引，例如，网络设备可以通过DCI向终端设备指示指示MCS索引，则终端设备可以根据接收的DCI确定MCS索引，那么S22也可以理解为，网络设备向终端设备发送DCI，则终端设备接收该DCI，该DCI就可以指示MCS索引。具体的，在DCI中包括MCS域(field)，MCS域就可以指示MCS索引。或者，MCS索引也可以是协议预先配置好的，终端设备和网络设备可直接确定，在这种情况下，无需执行S23，即，网络设备无需向终端设备发送MCS索引，另外在这种情况下，网络设备可以选择在S22中确定MCS索引，或者也可以在其他的任意步骤位置确定MCS索引。或者，MCS索引可以是网络设备通过高层信令等其他信令所配置的，那么，S23可以理解为，网络设备向终端设备发送高层信令等其他信令，则终端设备接收该高层信令等其他信令，该高层信令等其他信令就可以指示MCS索引，另外在这种情况中，S23不一定是位于当前的位置，也可以发生在S26之前的任意步骤位置。
鉴于此，S22也是可选的步骤，因为即使网络设备未发送MCS索引，终端设备也可以确定MCS索引和第一信息。
另外，S26也是可选的步骤，因为终端设备不一定会传输第二信息。在图2中，将用于表示可选的步骤的箭头都画为虚线，以与其他步骤相区分。另外，因为第二信息可能是上行信息，也可能是下行信息，因此在图2中以双向箭头表示，即，该双向箭头并不是表示终端设备和网络设备都发送第一信息，只是表示第二信息可能是终端设备发送的，也可能是网络设备发送的。这里的终端设备传输第二信息，具体可以是终端设备发送第二信息或终端设备接收第二信息。
如果网络设备未从终端设备接收CSI，则网络设备可直接为终端设备调度第二信息或者终端直接发送第二信息，而如果网络设备从终端设备接收了CSI，则网络设备可以根据接收的CSI为终端设备调度第二信息。可见，终端设备向网络设备发送CSI越及时，则网络设备为终端设备分配资源和MCS选择就可以更加精准，从而提高系统资源的使用效率并且可以提高终端设备传输第二信息的准确性。
在本申请实施例中，该DCI可以用于调度第二信息，例如，DCI可指示用于传输第二信息的时域资源和/或频域资源。第二信息包括数据和/或控制信息，控制信息例如包括CSI，还可以包括其他信息。其中，第二信息可以通过PUSCH承载，或者通过物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH)承载，或者PUCCH承载，例如，第二信息可以是承载在PUSCH中的上行数据和/或上行控制信息，或者，第二信息可以是承载在PDSCH中的下行数据和/或下行控制信息，或者，第二信息可以是承载在PUCCH中的上行控制信息。或者，该DCI也可以不用于调度，例如，该DCI可以专门用于指示第一信息。
而终端设备确定第一信息，可以有不同的确定方式，例如，终端设备确定第一信息，包括但不限于以下方式中的至少一种：
A、根据接收的DCI确定第一信息；
B、根据在第一时间窗内接收第一混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request，HARQ)应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数确定第一信息，第一HARQ应答信息为第一肯定应答信息或第一否定应答信息。
下面分别介绍如上两种确定第一信息的方式。
A、终端设备根据接收的DCI确定第一信息。
在方式A下，终端设备所确定的第一信息可包括多种不同的信息。作为方式A下的第一种示例，终端设备确定的第一信息包括以下的至少一种：
所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格，所述调制编码方式表格为多个调制编码方式表格中的至少一个；
所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值；
所述DCI所在的搜索空间；
所述DCI所在的载波(carrier)；
所述DCI所在的小区(cell)；
所述DCI所在的带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)；
所述DCI所在的TAG；
所述DCI所在的PUCCH group；
所述DCI的子载波间隔；
所述DCI的波形；
所述DCI的检测周期；
所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔，其中，所述反馈时间间隔为从发送所述第二信息包含的数据到所述终端设备发送所述数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息之间的时间间隔，或，为从调度所述第二信息的DCI到所述终端设备发送所述第二信息之间的时间间隔；
所述DCI所指示的A-CSI；
所述DCI的控制信道元素(control channel element，CCE)聚合等级；和，
所述DCI所在的控制资源组(CORSET)。
相应的，如果终端设备根据接收的DCI确定第一信息，因为网络设备是先确定第一信息再发送DCI，因此，网络设备就是直接确定第一信息，或者是根据待发送的DCI确定第一信息。例如，网络设备确定的第一信息相应包括以下的至少一种：
调制编码方式表格，所述调制编码方式表格为多个调制编码方式表格中的至少一个；
调制编码方式索引偏移值；
所述DCI所在的搜索空间；
所述DCI所在的载波；
所述DCI所在的小区；
所述DCI所在的带宽部分；
所述DCI所在的TAG；
所述DCI所在的PUCCH group；
所述DCI的子载波间隔；
所述DCI的波形；
所述DCI的检测周期；
反馈时间间隔，其中，所述反馈时间间隔为从发送所述第二信息包含的数据到所述终端设备发送所述数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息之间的时间间隔，或，为从调度所述第二信息的DCI到所述终端设备发送所述第二信息之间的时间间隔；
A-CSI；
所述DCI的CCE聚合等级；和，
所述DCI所在的CORSET。
其中，终端设备所确定的第一信息和网络设备所确定的第一信息应该是一样的，例如，终端设备和网络设备都确定第一信息包括所述DCI所在的载波。
在下文的介绍过程中，主要在终端设备角度介绍第一信息，以及根据第一信息确定MCS索引对应的MCS信息等，对于网络设备来说，确定第一信息的过程，或者说所确定的第一信息的内容也是类似的。
接下来，分别介绍如上的第一信息。
A1、第一信息包括DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收的DCI确定所述DCI所指示的MCS表格，从而根据DCI所指示的MCS表格确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
对于URLLC业务来说，可以支持一个或多个MCS表格，可能一个MCS表格对应一个BLER，或者一个MCS表格对应多个BLER。在多个MCS表格中的每个MCS表格中，包括了至少一种MCS信息，每种MCS信息都有其对应的MCS索引。
终端设备可根据接收的DCI的MCS域确定MCS索引，或者根据协议或高层信令等确定MCS索引。一般情况下，由于DCI的MCS域是统一的比特数，即代表的含义相同均为MCS索引(0～Y)。所以多个MCS表格中的MCS索引会分别编号，那么，不同的MCS表格中的MCS索引可能会相同，例如，MCS表格1中有MCS索引1，而MCS表格2中也有MCS索引1。因此，终端设备除了要获得MCS索引之外，还需要确定究竟使用哪个MCS表格，从而才能唯一确定MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
具体的，DCI所指示的MCS表格为第一MCS表格，第一MCS表格中的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI所指示的MCS表格为第二MCS表格，第二MCS表格中的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI所指示的MCS表格为第一MCS表格，则终端设备确定第一MCS表格中的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI所指示的MCS表格为第二MCS表格，则终端设备确定第二MCS表格中的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
或者，DCI所指示的MCS表格为多个MCS表格中的至少一个，多个MCS表格包括第一MCS表格和第二MCS表格，那么，站在描述MCS表格的角度，也可以将实施方式A1的方案描述为：第一MCS表格中包括的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二MCS表格中包括的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
在实施方式A1中，DCI可以指示MCS表格，则终端设备根据该DCI就可以确定MCS表格，从而可确定MCS信息，如果DCI也一并指示了MCS索引，则终端设备无需接收更 多的信息就能确定MCS信息，减少对传输资源的占用，且指示方式较为简单。
A2、第一信息包括DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收的DCI确定所述DCI所指示的MCS索引偏移值，从而根据DCI所指示的MCS索引偏移值确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
其中，前文中已经介绍了，本文可将调制编码方式简称为MCS，因此，也可将调制编码方式索引偏移值简称为MCS索引偏移值。例如，DCI所指示的MCS索引偏移值为多个MCS索引偏移值中的至少一个，多个MCS索引偏移值包括第一MCS索引偏移值和第二MCS索引偏移值。
在前文介绍了，系统可以支持一个或多个MCS表格，可能一个MCS表格对应一个BLER，或者一个MCS表格对应多个BLER。在多个MCS表格中的每个MCS表格中，包括了至少一种MCS信息，每种MCS信息都有其对应的MCS索引。
作为一种示例，系统支持一个MCS表格，该MCS表格对应一个BLER或多个BLER，在该MCS表格中，MCS索引可以是顺序编号的。则，DCI可以指示MCS索引偏移值，终端设备根据DCI指示的MCS索引偏移值，以及确定的MCS索引，就可以确定DCI所指示的该MCS表格中的MCS信息。具体的，终端设备可以在确定的MCS索引的基础上再加上该MCS索引偏移值(或者减去MCS索引偏移值)，得到该MCS表格中的一个MCS索引，而这个MCS索引对应的MCS信息就是要确定的MCS信息。
例如在MCS表格中，MCS索引编号为0～31，终端设备例如根据高层信令的配置或DCI中的MCS域确定的MCS索引为2，DCI指示的MCS索引偏移值为16，则终端设备就可以在MCS表格中确定MCS索引18，MCS索引18所指示的MCS信息就是终端设备要确定的MCS信息。例如在MCS表格中，总MCS索引编号为0～31，终端设备例如根据高层信令的配置或DCI中的MCS域确定的MCS索引为2，DCI指示的MCS索引偏移值为-16，则终端设备就可以在MCS表格中确定MCS索引等于(MCS索引+MCS索引偏移值)MOD总MCS索引编N，即(2-16)mod 32＝14，MCS索引14所指示的MCS信息就是终端设备要确定的MCS信息。
作为另一种示例，系统支持多个MCS表格，其中的每个MCS表格可对应一个BLER或多个BLER，该多个MCS表格中，MCS索引可以是统一顺序编号的，例如第一MCS表格中包括16个MCS信息，对应的MCS索引为MCS索引0～MCS索引15，第二MCS表格中包括16个MCS信息，对应的MCS索引为MCS索引16～MCS索引31，以此类推。则，DCI可以指示MCS索引偏移值，终端设备根据DCI指示的MCS索引偏移值，以及所确定的MCS索引，就可以确定DCI所指示的究竟是哪个MCS表格中的哪个MCS信息。具体的，终端设备可以在确定的MCS索引的基础上再加上该MCS索引偏移值，得到其中一个MCS表格中的一个MCS索引，而这个MCS索引对应的MCS信息就是要确定的MCS信息。
例如，DCI所指示的MCS索引偏移值为第一索引偏移值，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，所述DCI所指示的MCS索引偏移值为第二索引偏移值，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI所指示的MCS索引偏移 值为第一索引偏移值，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI所指示的MCS索引偏移值为第二索引偏移值，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。具体的，可以理解为，所述MCS索引与第一索引偏移值对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，所述MCS索引与第二索引偏移值对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
举例来说，有2个MCS表格，第一MCS表格包括的16个MCS信息对应的MCS索引为MCS索引0～MCS索引15，第二MCS表格包括的16个MCS信息对应的MCS索引为MCS索引16～MCS索引31。终端设备例如根据DCI的指示确定的MCS索引为2，DCI指示的MCS索引偏移值为16，则终端设备就可以得到MCS索引18，MCS索引18所指示的MCS信息就是终端设备要确定的MCS信息。或者，终端设备例如根据DCI的指示确定的MCS索引为2，DCI指示的MCS索引偏移值为0，则终端设备就可以得到MCS索引0，MCS索引0所指示的MCS信息就是终端设备要确定的MCS信息。其中，MCS索引18位于第二MCS表格中，MCS索引0位于第一MCS表格中，因此，也可以认为MCS索引偏移值就能用于指示具体的MCS表格。
或者，DCI所指示的MCS索引偏移值为多个MCS索引偏移值中的至少一个，多个MCS索引偏移值包括第一MCS索引偏移值和第二MCS索引偏移值，那么，站在描述MCS索引偏移值的角度，也可以将实施方式A2的方案描述为：第一MCS索引偏移值对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二MCS索引偏移值对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一MCS索引偏移值对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI所指示的MCS索引偏移值为第一MCS索引偏移值时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI指示的MCS索引偏移值是第一MCS索引偏移值还是第二MCS索引偏移值，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是MCS索引偏移值与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调MCS索引偏移值与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二MCS索引偏移值对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
无论是实施方式A1中的第一信息包括DCI所指示的MCS表格，还是实施方式A2中的第一信息包括DCI所指示的MCS索引偏移值，指示方式都较为简单直接，易于实现。
A3、第一信息包括DCI所在的搜索空间。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据DCI所在的搜索空间，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收的DCI确定所述DCI所在的搜索空间，从而根据DCI所在的搜索空间确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
一般来说，网络设备为终端设备配置的搜索空间包括公共搜索空间(common search space，CSS)和用户专用搜索空间，用户专用搜索空间例如为用户设备专用搜索空间(UE-specific search space，USS)。例如，DCI所指示的搜索空间为多个搜索空间中的至少一个，多个搜索空间包括公共搜索空间和用户专用搜索空间。
具体的，DCI所在的搜索空间为公共搜索空间(或理解为，终端设备是从公共搜索空间接收该DCI)，则终端设备可以确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息， 而如果DCI所在的搜索空间为用户专用搜索空间(或理解为，终端设备是从用户专用搜索空间接收该DCI)，则终端设备可以确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI所在的搜索空间为公共搜索空间，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，所述DCI所在的搜索空间为用户专用搜索空间，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
或者，DCI所指示的搜索空间为多个搜索空间中的至少一个，多个搜索空间包括公共搜索空间和用户专用搜索空间，那么，站在描述搜索空间的角度，也可以将实施方式A3的方案描述为：公共搜索空间对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，用户专用搜索空间对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，公共搜索空间对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI所指示的搜索空间为公共搜索空间时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI指示的搜索空间是公共搜索空间还是用户专用搜索空间，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是搜索空间与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调搜索空间与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，用户专用搜索空间对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
其中，公共搜索空间的出现频率一般较低，而用户专用搜索空间的出现频率一般较高。因此，公共搜索空间更适合BLER较高的MCS信息，而用户专用搜索空间更适合BLER较低的MCS信息，从该角度考虑，则第二MCS信息对应的BLER可以小于第一MCS信息对应的BLER。
可以理解的，本申请中DCI可以是调度第二信息的DCI，也可以是指示MCS索引的DCI，也可以其他DCI，本申请并不限制。
A4、第一信息包括DCI所在的载波。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据DCI所在的载波，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为，终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收的DCI确定所述DCI所在的载波，从而根据DCI所在的载波确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
例如，DCI所在的载波为多个载波中的至少一个，所述多个载波包括第一载波和第二载波，。
具体的，DCI所在的载波为第一载波，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI所在的载波为第二载波，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI所在的载波为第一载波，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI所在的载波为第二载波，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
例如，系统可能会将URLLC业务承载在特定的载波上传输，将其他业务承载在其他载波上传输，那么如果终端设备通过承载URLLC业务的载波接收DCI，则表明DCI所调度的第二信息属于URLLC业务，URLLC业务需要较高的可靠性，则就可以选用BLER较低的MCS信息，而如果终端设备通过承载其他业务的载波接收DCI，则表明DCI所调度的第二信息属于除URLLC业务外的其他业务，其他业务的可靠性要求没有URLLC业务高，则就可以选用BLER较高的MCS信息。
具体的，DCI所在的载波为主载波，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。DCI所在的载波为辅载波，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
例如第一载波为承载除URLLC业务之外的其他业务的载波，如前文所述，系统支持多个MCS表格，以支持2个MCS表格为例，终端设备根据第一载波就可以确定选用BLER高的MCS表格，例如选用的是第一MCS表格，再结合MCS索引，终端设备就可以确定选用的是第一MCS表格中的哪个MCS信息，例如选择的是第一MCS信息。同理，例如第二载波为承载URLLC业务的载波，继续以系统支持2个MCS表格为例，终端设备根据第二载波就可以确定选用BLER低的MCS表格，例如选用的是第二MCS表格，再结合MCS索引，终端设备可以确定选用的是第二MCS表格中的哪个MCS信息，例如选择的是第二MCS信息。具体的，主载波对应MCS表格为第一MCS表格，进而确定第一MCS信息。辅载波对应的MCS为第二MCS表格，进而确定第二MCS信息。
需要说明的是，载波与MCS信息的对应可以是系统预先定义或高层信令或物理层信令通知的。
或者，DCI所在的载波为多个载波中的至少一个，多个载波包括第一载波和第二载波，那么，站在描述载波的角度，也可以将实施方式A4的方案描述为：第一载波对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二载波对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一载波对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI所在的载波为第一载波时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI所在的载波是第一载波还是第二载波，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是载波与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调载波与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二载波对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
另外，第一信息还可以包括所述DCI所在的小区、所述DCI所在的BWP、所述DCI所在的TAG、所述DCI所在的PUCCH组(group)、所述DCI的子载波间隔、所述DCI的波形中的至少一种，这几种情况与第一信息包括所述DCI所在的载波的情况类似，因此放到实施方式A4下一并介绍。
以第一信息包括所述DCI所在的小区为例。
例如系统或协议可预先规定或高层信令或物理层信令通知，所述DCI所在的小区为第一小区，例如宏小区，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。所述DCI所在的小区为第二小区，例如微小区，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
具体的，系统或协议可预先规定或高层信令或物理层信令通知，某些小区对应于高误块率的MCS表格，某些小区对应于低误块率的MCS表格，例如规定，第一小区对应于高误块率的MCS表格，第一小区对应于低误块率的MCS表格。那么，DCI所在的小区为第一小区，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI所在的载波为第二小区，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI所在的小区为第一小区，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI所在的小区为第二小区，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
或者，DCI所在的小区为多个小区中的至少一个，多个小区包括第一小区和第二小区， 那么，站在描述小区的角度，也可以将此方案描述为：第一小区对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二小区对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一小区对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI所在的小区为第一小区时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI所在的小区是第一小区还是第二小区，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是小区与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调小区与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二小区对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
以第一信息包括所述DCI所在的BWP为例。
例如系统或协议可预先规定或高层信令或物理层信令通知，所述DCI所在的BWP为第一BWP，例如初始BWP或者缺省BWP，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。所述DCI所在的BWP为第二BWP，例如激活BWP，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
或者，DCI所在的BWP为多个BWP中的至少一个，多个BWP包括第一BWP和第二BWP，那么，站在描述BWP的角度，也可以将此方案描述为：第一BWP对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二BWP对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一BWP对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI所在的BWP为第一BWP时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI所在的BWP是第一BWP还是第二BWP，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是BWP与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调BWP与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二BWP对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
以第一信息包括所述DCI所在的TAG为例。
例如系统或协议可预先规定或高层信令或物理层信令通知，所述DCI所在的TAG为第一TAG，例如primary TAG，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。所述DCI所在的TAG为第二TAG，例如secondary TAG，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
或者，DCI所在的TAG为多个TAG中的至少一个，多个TAG包括第一TAG和第二TAG，那么，站在描述TAG的角度，也可以将此方案描述为：第一TAG对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二TAG对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一TAG对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI所在的TAG为第一TAG时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI所在的TAG是第一TAG还是第二TAG，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是TAG与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调TAG与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二TAG对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
以第一信息包括所述DCI所在的PUCCH组(group)为例。
例如系统或协议可预先规定或高层信令或物理层信令通知，所述DCI所在的PUCCH group为第一PUCCH group，例如主(primary)PUCCH group，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。所述DCI所在的PUCCH group为第二PUCCH group，例如辅(secondary)PUCCH group，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
或者，DCI所在的PUCCH group为多个PUCCH group中的至少一个，多个PUCCH group包括第一PUCCH group和第二PUCCH group，那么，站在描述PUCCH group的角度，也可以将此方案描述为：第一PUCCH group对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二PUCCH group对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一PUCCH group对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI所在的PUCCH group为第一PUCCH group时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI所在的PUCCH group是第一PUCCH group还是第二PUCCH group，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是PUCCH group与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调PUCCH group与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二PUCCH group对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
以第一信息包括所述DCI的子载波间隔为例。
例如系统或协议可预先规定或高层信令或物理层信令通知，所述DCI所在的子载波间隔为第一子载波间隔，例如60khz，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。所述DCI所在的子载波间隔为第二子载波间隔，例如15khz，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。第一MCS信息对应的子载波间隔与第二MCS信息对应的子载波间隔不同。即可选的，第一MCS信息对应的子载波间隔大于第二MCS信息对应的子载波间隔。
或者，DCI的子载波间隔为多个子载波间隔中的至少一个，多个子载波间隔包括第一子载波间隔和第二子载波间隔，那么，站在描述子载波间隔的角度，也可以将此方案描述为：第一子载波间隔对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二子载波间隔对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一子载波间隔对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI的子载波间隔为第一子载波间隔时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI的子载波间隔是第一子载波间隔还是第二子载波间隔，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是子载波间隔与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调子载波间隔与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二子载波间隔对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
以第一信息包括所述DCI的波形为例。
例如系统或协议可预先规定或高层信令或物理层信令通知，所述DCI所在的波形为第一波形，例如SC-FDMA，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。所述DCI所在的波形为第二波形，例如OFDM，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。第一MCS信息对应的波形与第二MCS信息对应的波形不同。
或者，DCI的波形为多个波形中的至少一个，多个波形包括第一波形和第二波形，那 么，站在描述波形的角度，也可以将此方案描述为：第一波形对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二波形对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一波形对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI的波形为第一波形时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI的波形是第一波形还是第二波形，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是波形与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调波形与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二波形对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
具体的举例与第一信息包括所述DCI所在的小区或载波的情况类似，不多赘述。
A5、第一信息包括DCI的检测周期。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收到的DCI的检测周期，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收的DCI确定所述DCI的检测周期，从而根据DCI的检测周期确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
例如，DCI的检测周期属于多个检测周期集合中的至少一个，所述多个检测周期集合包括第一检测周期集合和第二检测周期集合。
具体的，DCI的检测周期属于第一检测周期集合，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI的检测周期属于第二检测周期集合，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI的检测周期属于第一检测周期集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一调MCS信息，或，DCI的检测周期属于第二检测周期集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
其中，DCI的检测周期属于第一检测周期集合，可以理解为，DCI的检测周期大于或等于第一检测周期。DCI的检测周期属于第二检测周期集合，可以理解为，DCI的检测周期小于第二检测周期，第一检测周期和第二检测周期作为两个门限值，可以通过协议规定，或者可由网络设备预先设置，并通过高层信令或动态信令告知终端设备，第一检测周期和第二检测周期，可以相等，也可以不相等，例如，第一检测周期大于第二检测周期。
例如，有2个MCS表格，分别为第一MCS表格和第二MCS表格。如果DCI的检测周期大于或等于第一检测周期，则终端设备确定选择第一MCS表格，再结合所述MCS索引，可以确定具体选择的是第一MCS表格中的第一MCS信息，或者，如果DCI的检测周期小于第二检测周期，则终端设备确定选择第二MCS表格，再结合所述MCS索引，可以确定具体选择的是第二MCS表格中的第二MCS信息。
可以理解为，DCI的检测周期越短，表明需求越紧急，这样的业务可能就是URLLC业务，或者是其他较为紧急的业务，对于这样的业务，就可以采用BLER较低的MCS表格，以保证可靠性。而如果DCI的检测周期较长，表明需求不是很紧急，这样的业务对于可靠性的要求一般不是很高，则对于这样的业务，就可以采用BLER较高的MCS表格。
或者，DCI的检测周期为多个检测周期中的至少一个，多个检测周期包括第一检测周期和第二检测周期，那么，站在描述检测周期的角度，也可以将实施方式A5的方案描述为：第一检测周期对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二检测周期对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二 MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一检测周期对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI的检测周期为第一检测周期时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI的检测周期是第一检测周期还是第二检测周期，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是检测周期与MCS信息之间的对应关系，或者是检测周期集合与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调检测周期(或检测周期集合)与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二检测周期对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
其中，本文是以DCI的检测周期大于或等于第一检测周期，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息都为第一MCS为例，实际上，DCI的检测周期等于第一检测周期时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息也可能不是第一MCS信息，例如，第一检测周期等于第二检测周期，则可以是，DCI的检测周期大于或等于第一检测周期，所述MCS索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一MCS信息，DCI的检测周期小于第一检测周期，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，或者也可以是，DCI的检测周期大于第一检测周期，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，DCI的检测周期小于或等于第一检测周期，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
即，本文对于“等于”的情况究竟如何划分不作限制，后文中在划分范围时，凡是涉及到“等于”的情况，都与此类似，在后文不再多赘述。
A6、第一信息包括DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收的DCI确定所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔，从而根据DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
例如，DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔属于多个时间间隔集合中的至少一个，所述多个时间间隔集合包括第一时间间隔集合和第二时间间隔集合。
具体的，DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔属于第一时间间隔集合，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔属于第二时间间隔集合，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔属于第一时间间隔集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔属于第二时间间隔集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
其中，反馈时间间隔属于第一时间间隔集合，可以理解为，反馈时间间隔大于或等于第一时间间隔，反馈时间间隔属于第二时间间隔集合，可以理解为，反馈时间间隔小于第二时间间隔，第一时间间隔和第二时间间隔作为两个门限值，可以通过协议规定，或者可由网络设备预先设置，并通过高层信令或动态信令告知终端设备，第一时间间隔和第二时间间隔，可以相等，也可以不相等，例如，第一时间间隔大于第二时间间隔。
作为一种示例，反馈时间间隔为从发送第二信息包含的数据到终端设备发送所述数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息之间的时间间隔，或，为从调度第二信息的DCI到终端设备发送第二信息之间的时间间隔。
本文中，将终端设备接收的HARQ应答信息称为第一HARQ应答信息，接收的HARQ应答信息包括肯定应答信息(ACK)/否定应答信息(NACK)，则终端设备接收的肯定应答信息就随之称为第一肯定应答信息，终端设备接收的否定应答信息就称为第一否定应答信息。以及，将终端设备发送的HARQ应答信息称为第二HARQ应答信息，发送的HARQ应答信息也包括肯定应答信息/否定应答信息，则终端设备发送的肯定应答信息就随之称为第二肯定应答信息，终端设备发送的否定应答信息就称为第二否定应答信息。
如果DCI用于调度下行数据，则反馈时间间隔就可以是从发送第二信息包含的下行数据到终端设备发送该下行数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息之间的时间间隔，或者，如果DCI用于调度上行数据或上行控制信息，则反馈时间间隔就可以是从调度第二信息包含的上行数据或上行控制信息的DCI到终端设备发送第二信息包含的上行数据或上行控制信息之间的时间间隔。
例如，有2个MCS表格，分别为第一MCS表格和第二MCS表格。如果DCI指示的反馈时间间隔大于或等于第一时间间隔，则终端设备确定选择第一MCS表格，再结合所述MCS索引，可以确定具体选择的是第一MCS表格中的第一MCS信息，或者，如果DCI指示的反馈时间间隔小于第二时间间隔，则终端设备确定选择第二MCS表格，再结合所述MCS索引，可以确定具体选择的是第二MCS表格中的第二MCS信息。例如第一时间间隔和/或第二时间间隔为M1个时隙slot，或M2的符号(symbol)数，其中M1为大于等于0的整数，M2为大于等于1的整数。示例性的M1＝0，M2＝14。
可以理解为，反馈时间间隔越短，表明需求越紧急，这样的业务可能就是URLLC业务，或者是其他较为紧急的业务，对于这样的业务，就可以采用BLER较低的MCS表格，以保证可靠性。而如反馈时间间隔较长，表明需求不是很紧急，这样的业务对于可靠性的要求一般不是很高，则对于这样的业务，就可以采用BLER较高的MCS表格。
作为另一种示例，反馈时间间隔还可以是从网络设备发送DCI或从终端设备接收DCI到本次业务传输完成的最大时长对应的时刻之间的时间间隔。
其中，URLLC业务规定了业务传输完成的最大时长，例如目前为1ms，也就是说，从URLLC业务到达发送端，到本次URLLC业务传输完成结束，期间的时长必须在1ms以内。而理论上来说，在网络设备发送DCI后，URLLC业务才开始传输，但在此之前，本次传输过程已经开始，例如可参考图3，图3中的A点表示URLLC业务到达发送端的时刻，B点表示网络设备发送DCI的时刻或终端设备接收DCI的时刻，C点表示本次传输过程结束的时刻。可以看到，网络设备发送DCI的时刻或终端设备接收DCI的时刻位于URLLC业务到达发送端的时刻之后，那么传输URLLC业务的时长也就是从B点到C点之间的时长，而这个时长也可以是本示例中的反馈时间间隔。如果B点到C点之间的时长过短，表明剩余的时间已经不多，则适合选用BLER较低的MCS表格，以提高传输的可靠性，尽量保证业务能够一次传输成功，而如果B点到C点之间的时长较长，表明剩余的时间还较为充足，则可以选用BLER较高的MCS表格。
或者，反馈时间间隔为多个时间间隔集合中的至少一个，多个时间间隔集合包括第一时间间隔集合和第二时间间隔集合，那么，站在描述时间间隔集合的角度，也可以将实施方式A6的方案描述为：第一时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息 不同。
这里所述的，第一时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在所述反馈时间间隔属于第一时间间隔集合时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论所述反馈时间间隔属于第一时间间隔集合还是第二时间间隔集合，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是反馈时间间隔与MCS信息之间的对应关系，或者说是时间间隔集合与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调反馈时间间隔(或时间间隔集合)与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
本实施例中也出现了对“等于”的划分情况，与实施方式A5类似，本实施例也只是以将反馈时间间隔等于第一时间间隔的情况划分为与反馈时间间隔大于第一时间间隔的情况一致为例，实际不限于此。具体对于“等于”的情况的介绍可参考实施方式A5，不多赘述。
其中，发送第二信息包含的下行数据的时刻，可以是指网络设备发送第二信息包含的下行数据的时刻，或者是指终端设备接收第二信息包含的下行数据的时刻，本申请实施例不作限制，下文以网络设备发送第二信息包含的下行数据的时刻为例。
进一步的，从发送第二信息包含的下行数据到终端设备发送该下行数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息之间的时间间隔，包括但不限于以下的至少一种实现方式：
从发送第二信息包含的下行数据所在的符号的起始时刻到终端设备发送该下行数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息所在的符号的起始时刻之间的时间间隔；
从发送第二信息包含的下行数据所在的符号的结束时刻到终端设备发送该下行数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息所在的符号的起始时刻之间的时间间隔；
从发送第二信息包含的下行数据所在的符号的索引到终端设备发送该下行数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息所在的符号的索引之间的时间间隔，该时间间隔例如为两个索引的差值；
从发送第二信息包含的下行数据所在的时隙(slot)的起始时刻到终端设备发送该下行数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息所在的时隙的起始时刻之间的时间间隔；
从发送第二信息包含的下行数据所在的时隙的结束时刻到终端设备发送该下行数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息所在的时隙的起始时刻之间的时间间隔；
从发送第二信息包含的下行数据所在的时隙的索引到终端设备发送该下行数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息所在的时隙的索引之间的时间间隔，该时间间隔例如为两个索引的差值。
A7、所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，还包括所述DCI的格式。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，和所述DCI的格式，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收的DCI确定所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，和所述DCI的格式，从而根据DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，和所述DCI的格式，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
例如，DCI的格式可以包括第一DCI格式和第二DCI格式，第一DCI格式的DCI可称为简洁的(compact)DCI，第二DCI格式的DCI可称为回退(fallback)DCI。可以理解为，第一DCI格式的DCI是适用于URLLC业务的DCI。第二DCI格式的DCI是适用于所有业务的DCI，例如DCI format 0_0和DCI format 1_0。另外，除了第一DCI格式和第二DCI格式之外，还有第三DCI格式的DCI，可称为普通(common)DCI，第三DCI格式的DCI可以是NR系统或LTE系统中的DCI，即，不区分业务的DCI，例如DCI format 0_1和DCI format 1_1。
本申请实施例提供的技术方案主要应用于第一DCI格式的DCI，即，终端设备所接收的DCI是第一DCI格式的DCI。其中，该DCI包括第一比特信息域和第二比特信息域，第一比特信息域可用于携带第一信息，则终端设备根据第一信息比特域，可以确定该DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或该DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值。其中，第二信息比特域包括的比特数大于或等于1。另外，第一DCI格式的DCI中的第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和，等于第二DCI格式的DCI中的第二比特信息域的大小。关于第二信息比特域，包括但不限于以下的至少一种实现方式：
实现方式1、第二比特信息域的比特数小于或等于2，第二比特信息域用于指示从第二信息到HARQ应答信息的反馈时间；
实现方式2、第二比特信息域的比特数小于或等于3，第二比特信息域用于指示第二信息占用的时域资源；
实现方式3、第二比特信息域的比特数等于1，第二比特信息域用于指示冗余版本(redundancy version，RV)，冗余版本版为0或3；
实现方式4、第二比特信息域的比特数等于1，第二比特信息域用于指示终端设备的发送功率命令字，发送功率命令字为0或3；
实现方式5、第二比特信息域的比特数等于4，第二比特信息域用于指示该调制编码方式索引。
下面分别介绍如上几种实现方式。
对于实现方式1，第二比特信息域用于指示从第二信息到第二HARQ应答信息的反馈时间，即，指示的是前文的实施方式A6中所述的反馈时间间隔，则第二比特信息域可以属于DCI中的下行数据到HARQ反馈时间指示(PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator)。
例如，在第二DCI格式的DCI中，PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator大小(size)等于X1比特，X1＝3。在第一DCI格式的DCI中，可以利用该DCI的PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator中的第二比特信息域继续实现PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing的功能，即，继续指示反馈时间间隔，而利用该DCI中的第一比特信息域来携带第一信息。其中，第二格式的PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field的大小可以大于或等于第一DCI格式的DCI的第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和。例如第二格式的PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field的大小等于第一DCI格式的DCI的第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和，在第一DCI格式的DCI中，第二比特信息域的大小小于或等于X1-1比特，第一比特信息域的大小大于或等于1比特。其中，在第二DCI格式的DCI中，可以认为不包含第一比特信息域，但包含第二比特信息域。
在实现方式1中，可以认为第一DCI格式的DCI中包含的第一比特信息域和第二比特信息域都属于PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field，只是利用PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field包括的不同比特实现不同的功能。或者，也可以认为是将第一DCI格式的DCI中的第一比特信息域作为一个独立的比特信息域，只是此时根据配置或预先定义认为第一DCI的第二比特信息域相比第二DCI的第二比特域信息域缩小，可以理解的是第一比特信息域不再属于PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field。
例如，比特信息域的单位是时隙，在传输URLLC业务时，由于有时延的要求，所以一般不会指示较远的时隙来反馈HARQ应答信息，这样即使反馈了可能也过期了。所以，在第一DCI格式的DCI中，可以将PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field适当缩小，或者理解为将用于实现PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field原本功能的比特信息域适当缩小，而PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field缩小后，原本属于PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator field的剩余的比特就可以用来携带第一信息。或者缩小后，就可以把节约下来的比特数用来指示第一信息。
可以理解的是，本实施例中认为第一DCI的总比特数与第二DCI的总比特数可以设置成相同，这样可以减少盲检测次数，为终端设备省电。
对于实现方式2，第二比特信息域用于指示第二信息占用的时域资源，则，如果该第一DCI格式的DCI用于调度下行数据，则第二比特信息域可以属于DCI中的PDSCH资源的时间域(time-domain PDSCH resource)，如果该第一DCI格式的DCI用于调度上行数据或上行控制信息，则第二比特信息域可以属于DCI中的PUSCH资源的时间域(time-domain PUSCH resources)。
目前，在第二DCI格式的DCI中，time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources的大小最多为X2比特，例如X2＝4。在第一DCI格式的DCI中，可以利用该DCI的time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources中的第二比特信息域继续实现time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources的功能，即，继续指示第二信息占用的时域资源，而利用该DCI的time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources中的第一比特信息域来携带第一信息。其中，第一DCI格式的DCI中，time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources的大小可以大于或等于第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和。例如，第一DCI格式的DCI中，time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources的大小等于第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和，第二比特信息域的大小小于或等于X2-1比特，第一比特信息域的大小大于或等于1比特。
其中，在第二DCI格式的DCI中，可以认为不包含第一比特信息域和包含第二比特信息域都属于time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources。在实现方式2中，可以认为第一DCI格式的DCI中的第一比特信息域和第二比特信息域也都属于time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources，只是利用time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources包括的不同比特实现不同的功能，或者，也可以认为是将第一DCI格式的DCI中的第一比特信息域作为一个独立的比特信息域，此时，只是此时根据配置或预先定义认为第一DCI的第二比特信息域相比第二DCI的第二比特域信息域缩小，可以理解的是第一比特信息域不再属于time-domain PDSCH resource或 time-domain PUSCH resources。
因为time-domain PDSCH resource用于指示PDSCH占用的时域资源的长度，time-domain PUSCH resources用于指示PUSCH占用的时域资源的长度，在传输URLLC业务时，由于有时延的要求，所以一般不会指示占用时域资源很大的信道来传输数据，因为这样即使接收端收到了信道，解码的时间过后也容易造成业务过期。所以在第一DCI格式的DCI中，可以将time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources适当缩小，或者理解为将用于实现time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources原本功能的比特信息域适当缩小，而time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources缩小后，原本属于time-domain PDSCH resource或time-domain PUSCH resources的剩余的比特就可以用来携带第一信息。或者理解为缩小后就可以把节约下来的比特数用来指示第一信息。
对于实现方式3，第二比特信息域用于指示冗余版本，则，第二比特信息域可以属于DCI中的RV field。
目前，在第二DCI格式的DCI中，RV field的大小等于X3比特，例如X3＝2。在第一DCI格式的DCI中，可以利用该DCI的RV field中的第二比特信息域继续实现RV field的功能，即，继续指示冗余版本，而利用该DCI的RV field中的第一比特信息域来携带第一信息。其中，第一DCI格式的DCI中，RV field的大小可以大于或等于第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和。例如第一DCI格式的DCI中，RV field的大小等于第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和，第二比特信息域的大小等于X3-1比特，第一比特信息域的大小等于1比特。
其中，在第二DCI格式的DCI中，可以认为不包含第一比特信息域和包含第二比特信息域都属于RV field。在实现方式3中，可以认为第一DCI格式的DCI中的第一比特信息域和第二比特信息域也都属于RV field，只是利用RV field包括的不同比特实现不同的功能。或者，也可以认为是将第一DCI格式的DCI中的第一比特信息域作为一个独立的比特信息域，只是此时根据配置或预先定义认为第一DCI的第二比特信息域相比第二DCI的第二比特域信息域缩小，可以理解的是第一比特信息域不再属于RV field。
在5G NR系统中，如果RV版本是0或3，则一般来说一次传输成功后接收端就能实现自解码，无需再借助于后续的传输，但如果RV版本是1或2，则一次只能传输一部分信息，剩余的信息还要借助于下次传输，但URLLC业务对于业务传输完成有严格的时间要求，例如1ms，则很可能不会有再次重新传输的机会，所以本申请实施例认为，对于URLLC业务来说，RV版本选0或3更合理，鉴于此，可以利用第二比特信息域来指示RV版本为0或3，而RV field所剩余的1比特就能利用来携带第一信息。或者理解为缩小后就可以把节约下来的比特数用来指示第一信息。但本申请实施例也不限制第二比特信息域具体的指示结果，例如也可以指示RV版本为0或1，或者指示RV版本为1或2，等等。
对于实现方式4，第二比特信息域用于指示终端设备的发送功率命令字，则第二比特信息域可以属于DCI中的发送功率控制(transmit power control，TPC)field(域)。则，如果该第一DCI格式的DCI用于调度下行数据，则第二比特信息域可以属于DCI中的PUCCH的发送功率控制命令(TPC command for scheduled PUCCH)，如果该第一DCI格式的DCI用于调度上行数据或上行控制信息，则第二比特信息域可以属于DCI中的PUSCH的发送功率控制命令(TPC command for scheduled PUSCH)。
目前，在第二DCI格式的DCI中，TPC field的大小等于X4比特。在第一DCI格式的DCI中，可以利用该DCI的TPC field中的第二比特信息域继续实现TPC field的功能，即，继续指示发送功率命令字，而利用该DCI的TPC field中的第一比特信息域来携带第一信息。其中，第一DCI格式的DCI中，TPC field的大小可以大于或等于第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和。例如第一DCI格式的DCI中，TPC field的大小等于第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和，第二比特信息域的大小等于X4-1比特，第一比特信息域的大小等于1比特。
其中，在第二DCI格式的DCI中，可以认为不包含第一比特信息域和包含第二比特信息域都属于TPC field。在实现方式4中，可以认为第一DCI格式的DCI中的第一比特信息域和第二比特信息域也都属于TPC field，只是利用TPC field包括的不同比特实现不同的功能，或者，也可以认为是将第一DCI格式的DCI中的第一比特信息域作为一个独立的比特信息域，只是此时根据配置或预先定义认为第一DCI的第二比特信息域相比第二DCI的第二比特域信息域缩小，可以理解的是第一比特信息域不再属于TPC field。
那么，关于第一DCI格式的DCI中的第二比特信息域具体的指示方式，包括但不限于以下几种可能性：
可能性1：第二比特信息域为1比特，用于指示0，或指示+3/+4；
可能性2：第二比特信息域为1比特，用于指示+1，或指示+3/+4；
可能性3：第二比特信息域为1比特，用于指示0，或指示+1。
其中，第二比特信息域指示为0，表明不调整发送功率，第二比特信息域指示为+3，表明将发送功率向上调整3个单位，以此类推。
因为在5G NR系统中，URLLC业务比较重要，所以如上的可能性是在TPC命令字中去掉了向下功率调整的因子，也就说要么是向上调整功率，要么是不调整功率，以保证URLLC业务的可靠性。但实际上也不限于此，例如，第二比特信息域也可以指示向下功率调整的因子，例如，第二比特信息域为1，用于指示+1，或指示-3/-4/-1，其中，第二比特信息域指示为-3，表明将发送功率向下调整3个单位，以此类推。具体的，对于第二比特信息域所指示的内容，本申请实施例不作限制。
对于实现方式5，第二比特信息域用于指示该调制编码方式索引，则第二比特信息域可以属于DCI中的MCS field。此信息域用来指示MCS索引。
目前，在第二DCI格式的DCI中，MCS field的大小等于X5比特，例如X5＝5。在第一DCI格式的DCI中，可以利用该DCI的MCS field中的第二比特信息域继续实现MCS field的功能，即，继续指示调制编码方式索引，而利用该DCI的MCS field中的第一比特信息域来携带第一信息。其中，第一DCI格式的DCI中，MCS field的大小可以大于或等于第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和。例如第一DCI格式的DCI中，MCS field的大小等于第一比特信息域的大小与第二比特信息域的大小之和，第二比特信息域的大小等于X5-1比特，第一比特信息域的大小等于1比特。
其中，在第二DCI格式的DCI中，可以认为不包含第一比特信息域和包含第二比特信息域都属于MCS field。在实现方式5中，可以认为第一DCI格式的DCI中的第一比特信息域和第二比特信息域都属于MCS field，只是利用MCS field包括的不同比特信息实现不同的功能，或者，也可以认为是将第一DCI格式的DCI中的第一比特信息域作为一个独立的比特信息域，只是此时根据配置或预先定义认为第一DCI的第二比特信息域相比第二 DCI的第二比特域信息域缩小，可以理解的是第一比特信息域不再属于MCS field。
一般来说，CQI表格通过4比特来指示，而对应于相同BLER的CQI表格和MCS表格是对应的，也就是说，采用4比特来指示MCS表格也是可以的。因此，可以利用MCS field中剩余的1比特来携带第一信息或者理解为缩小后就可以把节约下来的比特数用来指示第一信息，从而更好地利用DCI资源。
以上X1，X2，X3，X4，X5为大于或等于1的正整数。可以理解为当X1-1＝0的时候，那么对应的第二比特信息域对应的信息为高层信令配置的或预先定义的含义，同理应用于X2，X3，X4，X5，这里不再赘述。
A8、所述DCI所指示的A-CSI。
本实施例的前提是，DCI中带有用于触发终端设备上报A-CSI的信息域，则DCI可以通过该信息域指示终端设备上报A-CSI。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据所述DCI所指示的A-CSI，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收的DCI确定所述DCI所指示的A-CSI，从而根据DCI所指示的A-CSI确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
作为一种示例，DCI所指示的A-CSI为多个A-CSI中的至少一个，多个A-CSI包括第一CSI和第二CSI。那么，DCI指示的A-CSI包括第一CSI，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI指示的A-CSI包括第二CSI，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI指示的A-CSI包括第一CSI，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI指示的A-CSI包括第二CSI，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
例如，网络设备或协议可以预先定义A-CSI与BLER之间的对应关系，终端设备可通过协议获知A-CSI与BLER之间的对应关系，或者该对应关系也可以通过高层信令或动态信令通知给终端设备。第一CSI对应第一BLER，第二CSI对应第二BLER，则，如果DCI指示终端设备上报第一CSI，则表明终端设备需上报的是第一BLER的CSI，如果DCI指示终端设备上报第二CSI，则表明终端设备需上报的是第二BLER的CSI。第一CSI和第二CSI都是A-CSI。那么，A-CSI与BLER之间有对应关系，BLER与MCS表格之间也有对应关系，则可以认为，A-CSI、BLER和MCS表格之间具有对应关系，例如，第一CSI对应于第一BLER，第一BLER对应于第一MCS表格，则可以认为第一CSI也就对应于第一MCS表格，第二CSI对应于第二BLER，第二BLER对应于第二MCS表格，则可以认为第二CSI也就对应于第二MCS表格。则，如果DCI指示终端设备上报第一CSI，则终端设备就可以确定要选用第一MCS表格，再结合所述MCS索引，终端设备就可以确定第一MCS表格中的第一MCS信息，而如果DCI指示终端设备上报第二CSI，则终端设备就可以确定要选用第二MCS表格，再结合所述MCS索引，终端设备就可以确定第二MCS表格中的第二MCS信息。具体的这里，第一CSI和第二CSI，可以是CSI报告，也可以是具体CSI包含的信息项。
或者，DCI所指示的A-CSI为多个A-CSI中的至少一个，多个A-CSI包括第一CSI和第二CSI，站在描述A-CSI的角度，也可以将实施方式A8的方案描述为：第一CSI对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二CSI对应的所述MCS索引 对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一CSI对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI指示的A-CSI为第一CSI时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI指示的A-CSI是第一CSI还是第二CSI，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是A-CSI与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调A-CSI与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二CSI对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
例如，CSI包括一个或多个CSI内容，CSI内容包括CQI,RI,PMI等等。若DCI指示的A-CSI包括缓慢变化的信息，例如RI和/或RSRP，表明CSI可能是不太紧急的业务，则需要BLER较高的MCS表格。若DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI包括快速的信息，例如CQI和/或PMI，表明CSI可能是比较紧急的业务，则需要BLER较低的MCS表格。又例如，若DCI指示的A-CSI包括CSI part 2，表明CSI可能是不太紧急的业务，则需要BLER较高的MCS表格。若DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI仅包括CSI part 1，表明CSI可能是比较紧急的业务，则需要BLER较低的MCS表格。需要说明的是，这里MCS表格和BLER的对应并不限定，即BLER与MCS表格的对应方式可以是预先定义或高层信令配置的。
可以理解的是，终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据CSI包括的CSI内容，确定MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
例如，CSI包括一个或多个CSI的比特信息数，CSI内容包括CQI,RI,PMI等等的比特信息。若DCI指示的A-CSI包括的比特信息数大于或等于第一比特数，表明CSI可能是不太紧急的业务，则需要BLER较高的MCS表格。若DCI指示的A-CSI包括的比特信息数小于第二比特数，表明CSI可能是比较紧急的业务，则需要BLER较低的MCS表格。
可以理解的是，终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据CSI包括的CSI的比特信息数，确定MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
作为另一种示例，DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI对应于多个BLER，所述多个BLER包括最高BLER和最低BLER，其中，最高BLER是指取值最大的BLER，最低BLER是指取值最小的BLER，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为其中的特定的BLER对应的MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI对应于多个BLER，则所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为其中的特定的BLER对应的MCS信息。其中，特定的BLER，例如为最高BLER，即，取值最大的BLER，例如最高BLER对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或者，特定的BLER例如为最低BLER，即，取值最小的BLER，例如最低BLER对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，或者，特定的BLER也可以是除最高BLER和最低BLER之外的其他BLER。
例如CSI包括一个或多个CSI报告(report)，不同的CSI报告可能对应不同的BLER，则DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI就可能对应于多个BLER。以一个MCS表格对应一个BLER为例，终端设备可以从多个MCS表格中选择一个MCS表格，选择的可以是其中的最高BLER对应的MCS表格，或者是其中的最低BLER对应的MCS表格等，再结合所述MCS索引，就可以确定MCS信息。至于终端设备究竟选择哪个BLER对应的MCS表格，可由协议预先定义，或者由高层信令或动态信令通知。
实施方式A8下的两个示例可单独应用，也可结合应用。
另外，DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI对应于多个BLER，所述多个BLER包括最高BLER 和最低BLER，则，站在描述BLER的角度，也可以将实施方式A8的方案描述为：最高BLER对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，最低BLER对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，或，最低BLER对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，最高BLER对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，最高BLER对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI指示的A-CSI为对应于最高BLER的CSI时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI指示的A-CSI对应的BLER是最高BLER还是最低BLER，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是A-CSI与MCS信息之间的对应关系，或者是A-CSI对应的BLER与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调A-CSI(或A-CSI对应的BLER)与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，最低BLER对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，或，最低BLER对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，最高BLER对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，等的理解，也是同理。
本实施例中也出现了对“等于”的划分情况，与实施方式A5类似，本实施例也只是以将DCI指示的A-CSI包括的比特信息数等于第一比特数划分为与DCI指示的A-CSI包括的比特信息数大于第一比特数的情况一致为例，实际不限于此。具体对于“等于”的情况的介绍可参考实施方式A5，不多赘述。
A9、第一信息包括DCI的CCE聚合等级。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据所述DCI的CCE聚合等级，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收的DCI确定所述DCI的CCE聚合等级，从而根据DCI的CCE聚合等级确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
例如，DCI的CCE聚合等级属于多个聚合等级集合中的至少一个，多个聚合等级集合包括第一聚合等级集合和第二聚合等级集合。
具体的，DCI的CCE聚合等级属于第一聚合等级集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI的CCE聚合等级属于第二聚合等级集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI的CCE聚合等级属于第一聚合等级集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，所述DCI的CCE聚合等级属于第二聚合等级集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
其中，DCI的CCE聚合等级属于第一聚合等级集合，可以理解为，DCI的聚合等级小于第一聚合等级，DCI的聚合等级属于第二聚合等级集合，可以理解为，DCI的聚合等级大于或等于第二聚合等级，第一聚合等级和第二聚合等级作为两个门限值，可以通过协议规定，或者可由网络设备预先设置，并通过高层信令或动态信令告知终端设备，第一聚合等级和第二聚合等级，可以相等，也可以不相等，例如，第一聚合等级小于第二聚合等级。
可以理解为，在高聚合等级下，终端设备能收到DCI的概率更高，那么这时很可能该终端设备的可靠性要求较高，则可以采用BLER较低的MCS表格，以保证可靠性。反之，在低聚合等级下，终端设备可能都没有收到DCI，所以此时该终端设备的可靠性要求不是 很高，则可以采用BLER较高的MCS表格。
例如有2个MCS表格，分别为第一MCS表格和第二MCS表格，第一MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-3，第二MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-5。例如DCI的CCE聚合等级为4，属于第一聚合等级集合，终端设备确定选用第一MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS表格中的第一MCS信息，或，DCI的CCE聚合等级为8或16，属于第二聚合等级集合，终端设备确定选用第二MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS表格中的第二MCS信息。
或者，DCI的CCE聚合等级属于多个聚合等级集合中的至少一个，多个聚合等级集合包括第一聚合等级集合和第二聚合等级集合，那么，站在描述聚合等级集合的角度，也可以将实施方式A9的方案描述为：第一聚合等级集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二聚合等级集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一聚合等级集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI的CCE聚合等级属于第一聚合等级集合时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI的CCE聚合等级是属于第一聚合等级集合还是第二聚合等级集合，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是聚合等级集合与MCS信息之间的对应关系，或者是DCI的CCE聚合等级与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调聚合等级集合(或DCI的CCE聚合等级)与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二聚合等级集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
本实施例中也出现了对“等于”的划分情况，与实施方式A5类似，本实施例也只是以将DCI的聚合等级等于第二聚合等级的情况划分为与DCI的聚合等级大于第二聚合等级的情况一致为例，实际不限于此。具体对于“等于”的情况的介绍可参考实施方式A5，不多赘述。
A10、第一信息包括DCI所在的CORSET。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据所述DCI所在的CORSET，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据接收的DCI确定所述DCI所在的CORSET，从而根据DCI所在的CORSET确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
例如，DCI所在的CORSET属于多个CORSET集合中的至少一个，多个CORSET集合包括第一CORSET集合和第二CORSET集合。
具体的，DCI所在的CORSET属于第一CORSET集合，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI所在的CORSET属于第二CORSET集合，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，DCI所在的CORSET属于第一CORSET集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，所述DCI所在的CORSET属于第二CORSET集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
作为一种示例，第一CORSET集合中对应的资源元素组(resource elements group，REG)绑定大小(bundle size)属于第一REG绑定大小集合，和/或，第二CORSET集合中对应 的REG绑定大小属于第二REG绑定大小集合。
在这种情况下，DCI所在的CORSET属于第一CORSET集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，所述DCI所在的CORSET属于第二CORSET集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，也可以理解为：DCI所在的REG绑定大小属于第一REG绑定大小集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，DCI所在的REG绑定大小属于第二REG绑定大小集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
其中，REG绑定大小属于第一REG绑定大小集合，可以理解为，REG绑定大小小于第一REG绑定大小，REG绑定大小属于第二REG绑定大小集合，可以理解为，REG绑定大小大于或等于第二REG绑定大小。第一REG绑定大小和第二REG绑定大小作为两个门限值，可以通过协议规定，或者可由网络设备预先设置，并通过高层信令或动态信令告知终端设备，第一REG绑定大小和第二REG绑定大小，可以相等，也可以不相等，例如，第一REG绑定大小小于第二REG绑定大小。
在高REG绑定大小下，终端设备能收到DCI的概率更高，那么这时很可能该终端设备的可靠性要求较高，则可以采用BLER较低的MCS表格，以保证可靠性。反之，在低REG绑定大小下，终端设备可能都没有收到DCI，所以此时该终端设备的可靠性要求不是很高，则可以采用BLER较高的MCS表格。
例如有2个MCS表格，分别为第一MCS表格和第二MCS表格，第一MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-3，第二MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-5。例如DCI的REG绑定大小为2，属于第一REG绑定大小集合，终端设备确定选用第一MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS表格中的第一MCS信息，或，DCI的REG绑定大小为6，属于第二REG绑定大小集合，终端设备确定选用第二MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS表格中的第二MCS信息。
或者，DCI所在的CORSET属于多个CORSET集合中的至少一个，多个CORSET集合包括第一CORSET集合和第二CORSET集合，那么，站在描述CORSET集合的角度，也可以将实施方式A10的方案描述为：第一CORSET集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二CORSET集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一CORSET集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在DCI所在的CORSET属于第一CORSET集合时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论DCI所在的CORSET是属于第一CORSET集合还是第二CORSET集合，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是CORSET集合与MCS信息之间的对应关系，或者是DCI所在的CORSET与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调CORSET集合(或DCI所在的CORSET)与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二CORSET集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
本实施例中也出现了对“等于”的划分情况，与实施方式A5类似，本实施例也只是以将DCI所在的REG绑定大小等于第二REG绑定大小的情况划分为与DCI所在的REG绑定大小大于第二REG绑定大小的情况一致为例，实际不限于此。具体对于“等于”的情况的介绍可参考实施方式A5，不多赘述。
本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据所述DCI所在的子载波间隔，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。此实施例和之后第二信息所在的资源的子载波间隔类似，这里不再赘述。
如上介绍的根据DCI确定的第一信息，可以理解为是直接根据DCI确定的信息，下面再介绍几种根据DCI确定的第一信息，下面介绍的根据DCI确定的第一信息，可以理解为是间接根据DCI确定的信息。
作为方式A下的第二种示例，DCI用于指示传输第二信息，那么，确定第一信息，可包括：根据DCI所指示传输的第二信息所在的资源，确定第一信息，其中，第一信息包括以下至少一项：
第二信息所在的资源所在的载波；
第二信息所在的资源所在的小区；
第二信息所在的资源所在的BWP；
第二信息所在的资源所在的TAG；
第二信息所在的资源所在的PUCCH group；
第二信息所在的资源对应的PUCCH格式；
第二信息所在的资源的子载波间隔；
第二信息所在的资源所在的波形；和，
第二信息所在的资源的时域长度。
因为是根据DCI确定第二信息，再根据第二信息所在的资源确定第一信息，因此可以理解为这是根据DCI间接确定第一信息。在方式A下的第二种示例中，终端设备和网络设备确定第一信息的方式是相同的，所确定的第一信息也是相同的。
在下文的介绍过程中，主要在终端设备角度介绍第一信息，以及根据第一信息确定MCS索引对应的MCS信息等，对于网络设备来说，确定第一信息的过程，或者说所确定的第一信息的内容也是类似的。
其中，第二信息所在的资源，可以理解为是用于承载第二信息的资源，因为在确定第一信息时，第二信息尚未发送，因此就描述为，第二信息所在的资源。终端设备确定第二信息所在的资源，可以通过DCI确定，例如DCI可以指示第二信息所在的资源，或者，也可以通过协议规定，或者，也可以通过高层信令或其他动态信令确定。
下面分别介绍如上的几种第一信息。
A11、第一信息包括第二信息所在的资源所在的载波。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据第二信息所在的资源所在的载波，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及确定接收的DCI所指示传输的第二信息所在的资源所在的载波，从而根据第二信息所在的资源所在的载波确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
例如，第二信息所在的资源所在的载波为多个载波中的至少一个，多个载波包括第一载波和第二载波。
具体的，第二信息所在的资源所在的载波为第一载波，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，第二信息所在的资源所在的载波为第二载波，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，第二信息所在的资源所在 的载波为第一载波，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，所述第二信息所在的资源所在的载波为第二载波，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
例如，系统可能会将URLLC业务承载在特定的载波上传输，将其他业务承载在其他载波上传输，那么如果通过承载URLLC业务的载波传输第二信息，则表明第二信息属于URLLC业务，URLLC业务需要较高的可靠性，则就可以选用BLER较低的MCS表格，而如果通过承载其他业务的载波传输第二信息，则表明第二信息属于除URLLC业务外的其他业务，其他业务的可靠性要求没有URLLC业务高，则就可以选用BLER较高的MCS表格。
具体的，第二信息所在的资源的所在的载波为主载波，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。第二信息所在的资源的所在的载波为辅载波，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
例如第一载波为承载除URLLC业务之外的其他业务的载波，如前文所述，系统支持多个MCS表格，以支持2个MCS表格为例，终端设备根据第一载波就可以确定选用BLER高的MCS表格，例如选用的是第一MCS表格，再结合MCS索引，终端设备就可以确定选用的是第一MCS表格中的哪个MCS信息，例如选择的是第一MCS信息。同理，例如第二载波为承载URLLC业务的载波，继续以系统支持2个MCS表格为例，终端设备根据第二载波就可以确定选用BLER低的MCS表格，例如选用的是第二MCS表格，再结合MCS索引，终端设备可以确定选用的是第二MCS表格中的哪个MCS信息，例如选择的是第二MCS信息。具体的，主载波对应MCS表格为第一MCS表格，进而确定第一MCS信息。辅载波对应的MCS为第二MCS表格，进而确定第二MCS信息。
需要说明的是，载波与MCS信息的对应可以是系统预先定义或高层信令或物理层信令通知的。
或者，第二信息所在的资源所在的载波属于多个载波中的至少一个，多个载波包括第一载波和第二载波，那么，站在描述载波的角度，也可以将实施方式A11的方案描述为：第一载波对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二载波对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一载波对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在第二信息所在的载波为第一载波时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论第二信息所在的载波是第一载波还是第二载波，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是载波与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调载波与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二载波对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
另外，第一信息还可以包括第二信息所在的资源所在的小区、第二信息所在的资源所在的BWP、第二信息所在的资源所在的TAG、第二信息所在的资源所在的PUCCH group、第二信息所在的资源的子载波间隔、第二信息所在的资源对应的PUCCH格式、第二信息所在的资源的波形中的至少一种，这几种情况与第一信息包括第二信息所在的资源所在的载波的情况类似，因此放到实施方式A11下一并介绍。
以第一信息包括第二信息所在的资源所在的小区为例。例如系统或协议可预先规定或高层信令或物理层信令通知的，某些小区对应于高误块率的MCS表格，某些小区对应于 低误块率的MCS表格，例如规定，第一小区对应于高误块率的MCS表格，第一小区对应于低误块率的MCS表格。那么，第二信息所在的资源所在的小区为第一小区，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，第二信息所在的资源所在的载波为第二小区，则终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，第二信息所在的资源所在的小区为第一小区，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，第二信息所在的资源所在的小区为第二小区，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。例如第一小区为宏小区，第二小区为微小区。或者，第二小区为宏小区，第一小区为微小区。
在第二信息所在的资源所在的BWP、第二信息所在的资源所在的TAG、第二信息所在的资源所在的PUCCH group、第二信息所在的资源的子载波间隔、第二信息所在的资源对应的PUCCH格式、第二信息所在的资源的波形等内容时，与第一信息包括第二信息所在的资源所在的小区或载波的情况类似，并且与A4类似，不多赘述。
A12、第一信息包括第二信息所在的资源的时域长度。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据第二信息所在的资源的时域长度，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及确定接收的DCI所指示传输的第二信息所在的资源的时域长度，从而根据第二信息所在的资源的时域长度确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
例如，第二信息所在的资源的时域长度属于多个时域长度集合中的至少一个，多个时域长度集合包括第一时域长度集合和第二时域长度集合。
具体的，第二信息所在的资源的时域长度属于第一时域长度集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，第二信息所在的资源的时域的长度属于第二时域长度集合，终端设备确定所述MCS方式索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，第二信息所在的资源的时域长度属于第一时域长度集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，第二信息所在的资源的时域的长度属于第二时域长度集合，所述MCS方式索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
第二信息所在的资源，可以是PDSCH、PUSCH或PUCCH，则确定的第二信息所在的资源的时域长度可以是承载第二信息的PDSCH、PUSCH或PUCCH的时域长度，这里的时域长度单位可以是符号、时隙或迷你时隙等，具体的不作限制。
其中，第二信息所在的资源的时域长度属于第一时域长度集合，可以理解为，第二信息所在的资源的时域长度大于或等于第一时域长度，第二信息所在的资源的时域长度属于第二时域长度集合，可以理解为，第二信息所在的资源的时域长度小于第二时域长度。第一时域长度和第二时域长度作为两个门限值，可以通过协议规定，或者可由网络设备预先设置，并通过高层信令或动态信令告知终端设备，第一时域长度和第二时域长度，可以相等，也可以不相等，例如，第一时域长度小于第二时域长度。
在第二信息所在的资源的时域长度较小的情况下，表明第二信息可能是比较紧急的业务，或者说留给第二信息的传输时间较短，则需要BLER较低的MCS表格，从而尽量保证第二信息能够在较短的时间内传输成功，而在第二信息所在的资源的时域长度较大的情况下，表明第二信息可能是不太紧急的业务，或者说留给第二信息的传输时间较多，则就可以使用BLER较高的MCS表格。
例如有2个MCS表格，分别为第一MCS表格和第二MCS表格，第一MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-3，第二MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-5。例如第二信息所在的资源的时域长度大于或等于第一时域长度，属于第一时域长度集合，终端设备确定选用第一MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS表格中的第一MCS信息，或，第二信息所在的资源的时域长度小于第二时域长度，属于第二时域长度集合，终端设备确定选用第二MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS表格中的第二MCS信息。
或者，第二信息所在的资源的时域长度属于多个时域长度集合中的至少一个，多个时域长度集合包括第一时域长度集合和第二时域长度集合，那么，站在描述时域长度集合的角度，也可以将实施方式A12的方案描述为：第一时域长度集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二时域长度集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一时域长度集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在第二信息所在的资源的时域长度属于第一时域长度集合时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论第二信息所在的资源的时域长度是属于第一时域长度集合还是第二时域长度集合，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是时域长度集合与MCS信息之间的对应关系，或者是第二信息所在的资源的时域长度与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调时域长度集合(或第二信息所在的资源的时域长度)与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二时域长度集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
本实施例中也出现了对“等于”的划分情况，与实施方式A5类似，本实施例也只是以将第二信息所在的资源的时域长度等于第一时域长度的情况划分为与第二信息所在的资源的时域长度大于第一时域长度的情况一致为例，实际不限于此。具体对于“等于”的情况的介绍可参考实施方式A5，不多赘述。
其中，方式A中的每种实施方式可单独应用，或者其中的任意几种实施方式也可结合应用。其中，第一信息的一种内容就可以认为是一种实施方式。
如上介绍了根据DCI确定第一信息的方式，下面介绍另一种确定第一信息的方式，
B、根据在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数确定第一信息，第一HARQ应答信息为第一肯定应答信息或第一否定应答信息。
在方式B下，确定的第一信息也可以有一种或多种，例如，第一信息包括以下至少一项：
在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数；
在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数；
在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值；
在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值。
如上的方式B所介绍的确定方式，是终端设备确定第一信息的方式，相应的，方式B中，网络设备确定第一信息，可包括：
根据在第一时间窗内发送第一HARQ应答信息的次数确定第一信息，第一HARQ应答信息为第一肯定应答信息或第一否定应答信息。
在方式B下，网络设备确定的第一信息也可以有一种或多种，例如，第一信息包括以下至少一项：
在第一时间窗内发送第一否定应答信息的次数；
在第一时间窗内发送第一肯定应答信息的次数；
在第一时间窗内发送第一否定应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应发送所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值；和，
在第一时间窗内发送第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应发送第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值。
对于终端设备来说，之所以未接收第一否定应答信息，可能是因为网络故障等原因导致的丢包，而对于网络设备来说，应该是针对每次传输的数据都会发送第一HARQ应答信息，因此网络设备可以不考虑在第一时间窗内未发送第一否定应答信息的次数。
其中，终端设备所确定的第一信息和网络设备所确定的第一信息应该是一样的，例如，终端设备和网络设备都确定第一信息包括所述DCI所在的载波。
在下文的介绍过程中，主要在终端设备角度介绍第一信息，以及根据第一信息确定MCS索引对应的MCS信息等，对于网络设备来说，确定第一信息的过程，或者说所确定的第一信息的内容也是类似的。
本申请实施例中，第一时间窗可以通过协议规定，或者也可以由网络设备配置，并通过高层信令或动态信令通知终端设备。
第一时间窗例如为：以接收承载MCS信息的DCI的时刻为终止时刻的单位时间，以确定MCS信息的时刻为终止时刻的单位时间，或者，以接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻为起始时刻，以在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后接收的第一个第一否定应答信息的时刻为终止时刻，或者，以接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻为起始时刻，以在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后第一次未接收第一HARQ应答信息的时刻为终止时刻，或者，以接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻为起始时刻，以在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后的预设时长的结束时刻为终止时刻。这里的第一肯定应答信息，可以是传输过程中的任意一个第一肯定应答信息，或者，以一个时间单元所在的起始时刻和终止时刻。
确定MCS信息的时刻，可理解为确定MCS信息的时刻所在的符号的起始时刻或终止时刻，或理解为确定MCS信息的时刻所在的时隙的起始时刻或终止时刻。以接收承载MCS信息的DCI的时刻，可理解为接收承载MCS信息的DCI的时刻所在的符号的起始时刻或终止时刻或索引，或理解为接收承载MCS信息的DCI的时刻所在的时隙的起始时刻或终止时刻或索引。
接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻，可理解为接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻所在的符号的起始时刻或终止时刻或索引，或理解为接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻所在的时隙的起始时刻或终止时刻或索引。
接收第一否定应答信息的时刻，可理解为接收第一否定应答信息的时刻所在的符号的起始时刻或终止时刻或索引，或理解为接收第一否定应答信息的时刻所在的时隙的起始时刻或终止时刻或索引。
未接收第一HARQ应答信息的时刻或索引，可理解为未接收第一HARQ应答信息的 时刻所在的符号的起始时刻或终止时刻或索引，或理解为未接收第一HARQ应答信息的时刻所在的时隙的起始时刻或终止时刻或索引。
在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后的预设时长的结束时刻，可理解为在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后的预设时长的结束时刻所在的符号的起始时刻或终止时刻或索引，或理解为在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后的预设时长的结束时刻所在的时隙的起始时刻或终止时刻或索引。
另外，单位时间，可理解为符号、时隙或迷你时隙等。如果第一时间窗为以确定MCS信息的时刻为终止时刻的单位时间，则可以理解为，第一时间窗是以确定MCS信息的时刻为终止时刻，向前推Z1个单位时间，Z1为正整数。如果第一时间窗为以接收承载MCS信息的DCI的时刻为终止时刻的单位时间，则可以理解为，第一时间窗是以接收承载MCS信息的DCI的时刻为终止时刻，向前推Z2个单位时间，Z2为正整数。例如第一时间窗定为1ms。
以一个时间单元所在的起始时刻和终止时刻，可理解为在一个时间单元上接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，其中一个时间单元可以Y1个时隙或者Y2个符号。时间单元可以是预先定义或高层信令或动态信令通知的，Y1和Y2为正整数。
如果第一时间窗为以接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻为起始时刻，以在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后的预设时长的结束时刻为终止时刻，则可以在接收一个第一肯定应答信息时确定进入一个第一时间窗，并启动定时器，定时器的定时时长即为预设时长，在定时器超时时，确定该第一时间窗结束，并刷新定时器，再下一次又接收另一个第一肯定应答信息时，再次启动定时器，进入下一个第一时间窗。
或者，以接收第一肯定应答信息的时刻为起始时刻，以在接收所述第一肯定应答信息之后第一次未接收第一HARQ应答信息的时刻为终止时刻
下面分别介绍方式B下的第一信息。
B1、第一信息包括在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及确定在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，从而根据在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数确定所述MCS索引对应的调制编码方式信息。
例如，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于多个次数集合中的至少一个，多个次数集合包括第一次数集合和第二次数集合。
具体的，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于第一次数集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收HARQ应答信息的次数属于第二次数集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。 或者理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于第一次数集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收HARQ应答信息的次数属于第二次数集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
其中，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于第一次数集合，可以理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数小于第一次数，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于第二次数集合，可以理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数大于或等于第二次数。第一次数和第二次数作为两个门限值，可以通过协议规定，或者可由网络设备预先设置，并通过高层信令或动态信令告知终端设备，第一次数和第二次数，可以相等，也可以不相等，例如，第一次数小于第二次数。
接收第一否定应答信息，表明网络设备接收错误，或者表明终端设备的上行数据传输错误，而未接收第一否定应答信息，很可能也是表明网络设备接收错误，或者可能表明终端设备的上行数据传输错误。如果接收第一否定应答信息和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数较多，说明网络设备一直接收错误，由于距离业务传输结束的时间越来越近，所以就要选择使用低BLER对应的MCS表格。
例如有2个MCS表格，分别为第一MCS表格和第二MCS表格，第一MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-3，第二MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-5。例如在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于第一次数集合，终端设备确定选用第一MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS表格中的第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于第二次数集合，终端设备确定选用第二MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS表格中的第二MCS信息。
或者，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于多个次数集合中的至少一个，多个次数集合包括第一次数集合和第二次数集合，那么，站在描述次数集合的角度，也可以将实施方式B1的方案描述为：第一次数集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二次数集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一次数集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，属于第一次数集合时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数是属于第一次数集合还是第二次数集合，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是次数集合与MCS信息之间的对应关系，或者是在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数与MCS信息之间的对应关 系，而不是强调次数集合(或在所述第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数)与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二次数集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
本实施例中也出现了对“等于”的划分情况，与实施方式A5类似，本实施例也只是以将在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数等于第二次数的情况划分为与在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数大于第二次数的情况一致为例，实际不限于此。具体对于“等于”的情况的介绍可参考实施方式A5，不多赘述。
B2、第一信息包括在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及确定在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，从而根据在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数确定所述MCS索引对应的调制编码方式信息。
例如，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数属于多个次数集合中的至少一个，多个次数集合包括第三次数集合和第四次数集合。
具体的，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数属于第三次数集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数属于第四次数集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数属于第三次数集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数属于第四次数集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
其中，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数属于第三次数集合，可以理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数大于或等于第三次数，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数属于第四次数集合，可以理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数小于第四次数。第三次数和第四次数作为两个门限值，可以通过协议规定，或者可由网络设备预先设置，并通过高层信令或动态信令告知终端设备，第三次数和第四次数，可以相等，也可以不相等，例如，第三次数大于第四次数。
接收第一肯定应答信息，表明网络设备接收正确，也能表明终端设备的上行数据传输正确。如果接收第一肯定应答信息的次数较少，说明网络设备一直接收错误，由于距离业务传输结束的时间越来越近，所以就要选择使用低BLER对应的MCS表格，而如果接收第一肯定应答信息的次数较多，则说明网络设备接收正确，这时就可以考虑选择高BLER对应的MCS表格。
例如有2个MCS表格，分别为第一MCS表格和第二MCS表格，第一MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-3，第二MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-5。例如在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数属于第三次数集合属于第三次数集合，终端设备确定选用第一MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS表格中的第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数属于第三次数集合属于第四次数集合，终端设备确定选用第二MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS表格中的第二MCS 信息。
或者，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数属于多个次数集合中的至少一个，多个次数集合包括第三次数集合和第四次数集合，那么，站在描述次数集合的角度，也可以也可以将实施方式B2的方案描述为描述为：第三次数集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第四次数集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一次数集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，属于第三次数集合时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数是属于第三次数集合还是第四次数集合，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是次数集合与MCS信息之间的对应关系，或者是在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调次数集合(或在所述第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数)与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二次数集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
本实施例中也出现了对“等于”的划分情况，与实施方式A5类似，本实施例也只是以将在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数等于第三次数的情况划分为与在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数大于第三次数的情况一致为例，实际不限于此。具体对于“等于”的情况的介绍可参考实施方式A5，不多赘述。
B3、第一信息包括在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值。
其中，在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数，可以由终端设备发送的上行数据决定，因为理论上来讲，终端设备每发送一个上行数据，就会接收一次第一HARQ应答信息。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，从而根据在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，确定所述MCS索引对应的调制编码方式信息。
例如，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于多个比值集合中的至少一个，多个比值集合包括第一比值集合和第二比值集合。
具体的，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第 一比值集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第二比值集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第一比值集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第二比值集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
其中，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第一比值集合，可以理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，小于第一比值，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第二比值集合，可以理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，大于或等于第二比值。第一比值和第二比值作为两个门限值，可以通过协议规定，或者可由网络设备预先设置，并通过高层信令或动态信令告知终端设备，第一比值和第二比值，可以相等，也可以不相等，例如，第一比值小于第二比值。
接收第一否定应答信息，表明网络设备接收错误，或者也可表明终端设备的上行数据传输错误。如果接收第一否定应答信息的次数与应接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数之间的比值较大，表明接收第一否定应答信息的次数较多，说明网络设备一直接收错误，由于距离业务传输结束的时间越来越近，所以就要选择使用低BLER对应的MCS表格，而如果接收第一否定应答信息的次数与应接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数之间的比值较小，表明接收第一否定应答信息的次数较少，则说明网络设备接收正确，这时就可以考虑选择高BLER对应的MCS表格。
例如有2个MCS表格，分别为第一MCS表格和第二MCS表格，第一MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-3，第二MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-5。例如在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第一比值集合，终端设备确定选用第一MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS表格中的第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第二比值集合，终端设备确定选用第二MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS表格中的第二MCS信息。
或者，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于多个比值集合中的至少一个，多个比值集合包括第一比值集合和第二比值集合，那么，站在描 述比值集合的角度，也可以也可以将实施方式B3的方案描述为描述为：第一比值集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第二比值集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第一比值集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第一比值集合时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，是属于第一比值集合还是第二比值集合，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是比值集合与MCS信息之间的对应关系，或者是在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调比值集合(或在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值)与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第二比值集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
本实施例中也出现了对“等于”的划分情况，与实施方式A5类似，本实施例也只是以将在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，等于第二比值的情况划分为与在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，大于第二比值的情况一致为例，实际不限于此。具体对于“等于”的情况的介绍可参考实施方式A5，不多赘述。
B4、第一信息包括在第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据在第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
或者，此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及在第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，从而根据在第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，确定所述MCS索引对应的调制编码方式信息。
例如，第一信息包括在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗 内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于多个比值集合中的至少一个，多个比值集合包括第三比值集合和第四比值集合。
具体的，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第三比值集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第四比值集合，终端设备确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。或者理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第三比值集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第四比值集合，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息。
其中，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第三比值集合，可以理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，大于或等于第三比值，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第四比值集合，可以理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，小于第四比值。第三比值和第四比值作为两个门限值，可以通过协议规定，或者可由网络设备预先设置，并通过高层信令或动态信令告知终端设备，第三比值和第四比值，可以相等，也可以不相等，例如，第三比值大于第四比值。
接收第一肯定应答信息，表明网络设备接收正确，或者也可表明终端设备的上行数据传输正确。如果接收第一肯定应答信息的次数与应接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数之间的比值较小，表明接收第一肯定应答信息的次数较少，说明网络设备一直接收错误，由于距离业务传输结束的时间越来越近，所以就要选择使用低BLER对应的MCS表格，而如果接收第一否定应答信息的次数与应接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数之间的比值较大，表明接收第一否定应答信息的次数较多，则说明网络设备接收正确，这时就可以考虑选择高BLER对应的MCS表格。
例如有2个MCS表格，分别为第一MCS表格和第二MCS表格，第一MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-3，第二MCS表格对应的BLER为10e-5。例如在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第三比值集合，终端设备确定选用第一MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS表格中的第一MCS信息，或，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第四比值集合，终端设备确定选用第二MCS表格，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS表格中的第二MCS信息。
或者，第一信息包括在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于多个比值集合中的至少一个，多个比值集合包括第三比值集合和第四比值集合，那么，站在描述比值集合的角度，也可以也可以将实施方式B4的方案描述为描述为：第三比值集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第 一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，第四比值集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，其中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同。
这里所述的，第三比值集合包括的在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息，应理解为，在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，属于第三比值集合时，所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第一MCS信息。无论在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，是属于第三比值集合还是第四比值集合，所述MCS索引都是未变化的，因此，这里强调的应该是比值集合与MCS信息之间的对应关系，或者是在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，与MCS信息之间的对应关系，而不是强调比值集合(或在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值)与所述MCS索引之间的对应关系。对于所述的，第四比值集合对应的所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息为第二MCS信息，的理解，也是同理。
本实施例中也出现了对“等于”的划分情况，与实施方式A5类似，本实施例也只是以将在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，等于第三比值的情况划分为与在第一时间窗内接收第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在第一时间窗内应接收第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值，大于第三比值的情况一致为例，实际不限于此。具体对于“等于”的情况的介绍可参考实施方式A5，不多赘述。
在上文中对于方式A和方式B的介绍，都是以第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息不同为例，在应用中，第一MCS信息与第二MCS信息也可以相同。
其中，方式B中的每种实施方式可单独应用，或者其中的任意几种实施方式也可结合应用。其中，第一信息的一种内容就可以认为是一种实施方式。
另外，方式A和方式B中的任意几种实施方式也可结合应用，下面介绍方式A下的实施方式和方式B下的实施方式结合使用的一种示例，例如将实施方式A1和实施方式B1进行结合。
在前文中介绍了，实施方式A1为第一信息包括DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格，实施方式B1为第一信息包括在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数。
进一步的，本申请实施例中此方法还可以描述为：终端设备确定MCS索引，以及根据DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格，以及第一信息包括在第一时间窗内接收第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数，确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。
可以理解的，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格，所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格为多个调制编码方式表格中的至少一个。可选的，所述多个调制编 码方式表格包括第一调制编码方式表格和第二调制编码方式表格。
可以理解的，所述第一信息包括在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于多个次数集合中的至少一个。所述多个次数集合包括第一次数集合和第二次数集合，所述第一次数集合包括的在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，所述第二次数集合包括的在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数。
进一步的，所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格为第一表格且在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于所述第一次数集合时，所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息；所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格为第二表格或在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数属于所述第一次数集合时，所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
方式A和方式B中其他的任意几种实施方式若结合使用，则结合方式也是类似的，本文不再多赘述。
在前文的介绍过程中，均是以终端设备确定MCS信息为例，在实际应用中，网络设备也会采用与终端设备相同的方式确定MCS信息，不多赘述。
本文中所述的“集合”，也可以理解为“范围”，例如，“第一比值集合”也可理解为“第一比值范围”，或者，“第一次数集合”也可理解为“第一次数范围”，等等。在“集合”中，所包括的元素可以是连续的取值范围，或者也可以是离散的至少一个取值，具体的不做限制。
在图2所示的实施例中，可以继续延用目前已有的MCS表格，无需对MCS表格进行修改，更易于适配已有的协议。
另外，请参见图4，本申请实施例提供第二种通信方法，在这种通信方法中，可直接修改目前的MCS表格，从而终端设备只要获得了MCS索引，就能够直接确定MCS信息，下面详细介绍。在下文的介绍过程中，继续以该方法应用在图1所示的应用场景为例。该方法的流程介绍如下。
S41、网络设备确定调制编码方式信息，所述调制编码方式信息包括调制方式(modulation)、编码码率(coding rate)和误块率，其中所述误块率为至少两个误块率中的一个，所述至少两个误块率包括所述第一误块率和所述第二误块率；
S42、网络设备确定所述调制编码方式信息对应的调制编码方式索引，所述调制编码方式索引为N个调制编码方式索引中的一个，N个调制编码方式索引为0～N-1，所述N个调制编码索引满足以下至少一种：
从调制编码方式索引X到调制编码方式索引Y对应第一误块率，从索引Y+1到索引Z对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝X<＝Y<Z<＝N-1，N为大于1的整数；以及
从调制编码方式索引A到调制编码方式索引B对应第一误块率，调制编码方式索引C对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝A<C<B<＝N-1，N为大于1的整数；
S43、终端设备确定所述调制编码方式索引；
S44、终端设备确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的所述调制编码方式信息；
S45、终端设备根据确定的调制编码方式信息传输第二信息。
第二信息包括数据和/或控制信息，控制信息例如包括CSI，还可以包括其他信息。其中，第二信息可以通过PUSCH承载，或者通过PDSCH承载，例如，第二信息可以是承载在PUSCH中的上行数据和/或上行控制信息，或者，第二信息可以是承载在PDSCH中的下行数据和/或下行控制信息。
S45是可选的步骤，因为终端设备不一定会传输第二信息。在图4中，将用于表示可选的步骤的箭头画为虚线，以与其他步骤相区分。另外，因为第二信息可能是上行信息，也可能是下行信息，因此在图4中以双向箭头表示，即，该双向箭头并不是表示终端设备和网络设备都发送第一信息，只是表示第二信息可能是终端设备发送的，也可能是网络设备发送的。
其中，网络设备可以通过DCI向终端设备指示MCS索引，则终端设备可以根据接收的DCI确定MCS索引，具体的，在DCI中包括MCS field，MCS域就可以指示MCS索引。或者，MCS索引也可以是协议预先配置好的，终端设备和网络设备可直接确定，或者，MCS索引可以是网络设备通过高层信令等其他信令配置给终端设备的。
如果MCS索引是协议预先配置好的，则网络设备可采用与终端设备相同的方式来确定MCS信息，即，确定协议规定的MCS索引，从而确定所述MCS索引对应的MCS信息。如果MCS索引是通过DCI或高层信令等配置给终端设备的，则网络设备可以先选择MCS信息，再确定所述MCS信息对应的MCS索引，再将所述MCS索引通过DCI或高层信令等配置给终端设备。
本申请实施例中，可以提供至少一个新的MCS表格，以其中的一个MCS表格为例，例如将其称为第一MCS表格。例如，N个MCS索引就是第一MCS表格包括的MCS索引。
在图2所示的实施例中，适用的MCS表格可以对应于1个BLER，而在图4所示的实施例中，新提供的第一MCS表格可以对应于至少2个BLER，例如该第一MCS表格至少对应于第一BLER和第二BLER。
其中，在第一MCS表格中，各项MCS信息可以随机排列，或者，因为考虑到了BLER，那么在第一MCS表格中，MCS信息之间就可以按照BLER来排列，具体的，按照BLER排列，则排列方式包括但不限于以下的至少一种可能性：
可能性1、按照BLER由低到高的顺序排列，且呈梳齿状排列。
例如第一MCS表格对应于2个BLER，分别为第一BLER和第二BLER，其中，第一BLER为10e-5，第二BLER为10e-3。那么排列顺序例如为：第一BLER->第二BLER->第一BLER->第二BLER，可参考表2。这也就是如前介绍的一种情况，即，从MCS索引A到MCS索引B对应第一误块率，MCS索引C对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝A<C<B<＝N-1，在这种情况下，对应于同一个BLER的MCS索引之间是不连续的，中间会插入对应于其他的BLER的MCS索引。
表1
MCS索引 modulation coding rate x 1024 BLER
0 1   10e-3
1 1   10e-5
2 1   10e-5
3 2   10e-3
4 2   10e-5
5 2   10e-3
6 2   10e-5
7 2   10e-3
8 2   10e-5
9 2   10e-3
10 2   10e-5
11 2   10e-3
12 2   10e-5
13 4   10e-3
14 4   10e-5
15 4   10e-3
16 4   10e-5
17 4   10e-3
18 4   10e-5
19 4   10e-3
20 6   10e-5
21 6   10e-3
22 6   10e-5
23 6   10e-3
24 6   10e-5
25 6   10e-3
26 6   10e-5
27 6   10e-3
28 6   10e-5
29 8   10e-3
30 8   10e-5
31 8   10e-3
…… ……   ……
表2中，Pi/2二进制相移键控(binary phase shift keying，BPSK)＝modulation 1；正交相移键控(quadrature phase shift keyin，QPSK)＝modulation 2；16正交幅度调制(quadrature amplitude modulation，QAM)＝modulation 4；64QAM＝modulation 6。即，如果modulation的取值为2，则表示调制方式为QPSK，以此类推。当然，这里介绍的几种对应关系只是举例，modulation的取值与具体的调制方式之间的对应关系不限于此。
其中，表2中的一行就可以理解为一个MCS信息，可以看到，一个MCS信息对应于一个MCS索引以及一系列的参数。MCS表格除了包括表2中所示的几种参数之外，还可能包括其他参数，只是与本申请的方案关联不大，所以不再一一列举。另外，关于编码码率的取值，也是与本申请的方案关联不大，所以在表2中未写出。需注意的是，本申请实施例所提供的第一MCS表格，可以包括表2中所示的至少一项，还可以包括表2中未示 出的可能的其他项，例如MCS索引还可能小于32，MCS索引还可能大于32，或者，第一MCS表格还可以对应更多的BLER等，只要符合可能性1所提供的排列方式，则均包括在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。其中，表2中的一项，表示表2中的一个MCS信息。可以理解为表2其中的一项或几项可以组成一个新的表2，也在本申请实施例的保护范围内。
按照表2所示的方式排列，使得整个表格中的效率值(efficiency)也是由小到大排列，系统的效率值代表的物理意义是频谱效率，一般来讲是越大越好，但是也受限于接收信噪比(signal-noise ratio，SNR)，所以需结合多种因素选取。如果MCS索引是通过DCI或高层信令等配置给终端设备的，则网络设备需要先选择MCS信息，例如网络设备在表2包括的至少一项中选择MCS信息，网络设备在选择MCS信息时，可以结合效率值来选取，相对于随机排列来说，采用这种排列方式，使得网络设备按顺序查找即可，节省了查找的时间。
可能性2、按照BLER由高到低的顺序排列。
例如第一MCS表格对应于3个BLER，分别为第一BLER、第二BLER和第三BLER，其中，第一BLER为10e-1，第二BLER为10e-2，第三BLER为10e-5。那么排列顺序例如为：第一BLER->第二BLER->第三BLER，可参考表3。这也就是如前介绍的另一种情况，即，从调制编码方式索引X到调制编码方式索引Y对应第一误块率，从索引Y+1到索引Z对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝X<＝Y<Z<＝N-1，在这种情况下，对应于同一个BLER的MCS索引之间是连续的，在对应于同一个BLER的MCS索引排列完之后才会排列对应于另一个BLER的MCS索引，对应于同一个BLER的MCS索引中间不会插入对应于其他的BLER的MCS索引。
表3
Figure PCTCN2019070510-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2019070510-appb-000003
表3中，modulation的取值与具体的调制方式之间的对应关系可参考对表2的介绍。当然也只是举例，modulation的取值与具体的调制方式之间的对应关系不限于此。
其中，表3中的一行就可以理解为一个MCS信息，可以看到，一个MCS信息对应于一个MCS索引以及一系列的参数。同理，MCS表格除了包括表3中所示的几种参数之外，还可能包括其他参数，只是与本申请的方案关联不大，所以不再一一列举。以及，关于编码码率的取值，也是与本申请的方案关联不大，所以在表3中也未写出。需注意的是，本申请实施例所提供的第一MCS表格，可以包括表3中所示的至少一项，还可以包括表3中未示出的可能的其他项，例如MCS索引还可能大于32，或者，第一MCS表格还可以对应更多的BLER等，只要符合可能性1所提供的排列方式，则均包括在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。其中，表3中的一项，表示表3中的一个MCS信息。可以理解为表3其中的一项或几项可以组成一个新的表3，也在本申请实施例的保护范围内。
综上，本申请实施例所提供的第一MCS表格，可以包括表2和/或表3中所示的至少一项，还可以包括表2和表3中未示出的可能的其他项。
MCS index＝0的值一般对应的是最低信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio，SINR)的值，而对于不同的BLER，最低SINR的值不同，显然高BLER的最低SINR>低BLER的最低SINR。例如，10e-1的最低SINR会高于10e-5的最低SINR。因此当一个MCS表格包括对应多个BLER的MCS信息时，可选的，MCS index＝0应对应最高BLER的MCS信息。例如，MCS表格包括10e-3的BLER和10e-5的BLER的MCS信息。那么MCS＝0需对应10e-3的BLER。
按照表3所示的方式排列，如果MCS索引是通过DCI或高层信令等配置给终端设备的，则网络设备需要先选择MCS信息，例如网络设备在表3包括的至少一项中选择MCS信息，网络设备在选择MCS信息时，可以结合SINR来选取，相对于随机排列来说，采用这种排列方式，使得网络设备按顺序查找即可，节省了查找的时间。
需声明的是，在介绍表2和表3时，第一BLER和第二BLER等的取值只是举例，本申请实施例不限制所提供的MCS表格所对应的至少2个BLER之间的大小和/或优先级。例如，本申请实施例不限制第一BLER和第二BLER之间的大小关系，和/或，不限制第一BLER和第二BLER之间的优先级。
本申请实施例中重新提供了MCS表格，则终端设备只需确定MCS索引就可以直接确定MCS信息，方式较为简单。
可以理解的，无论是图2所示的实施例所提供的技术方案还是图4所示的实施例所提供的技术方案，都可以应用在传输URLLC业务或其他类似业务的场景下。以终端设备为例，终端设备可能会进行上行传输或下行传输，则图2所示的实施例所提供的技术方案或图4所示的实施例所提供的技术方案，可以应用在终端设备传输URLLC业务或其他类似业务的传输方向上，例如终端设备的上行传输所传输的是URLLC业务，则终端设备的上行传输就可以应用图2所示的实施例所提供的技术方案或图4所示的实施例所提供的技术方案，而终端设备的下行传输所传输的是除URLLC业务外的其他业务，则终端设备的下行传输可以应用图2所示的实施例所提供的技术方案或图4所示的实施例所提供的技术方案，或者也可以不采用本申请实施例提供的技术方案，例如可继续采用现有技术中的技术方案，本申请实施例不作限制。
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例提供的设备。
图5示出了一种通信设备500，该通信设备500例如为终端设备。该通信设备500可以实现上文中涉及的终端设备的功能。该通信设备500可以是上文中所述的终端设备，或者可以是设置在上文中所述的终端设备中的芯片。该通信设备500可以包括处理器501和收发器502。其中，处理器501可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S24、S25和S26，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发器502可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S21、S23和S27，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
例如，处理器501，用于确定调制编码方式索引；
处理器501，还用于确定第一信息，所述确定第一信息包括：
根据收发器502接收的DCI确定所述第一信息；和/或，
根据收发器502在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数确定所述第一信息，所述第一HARQ应答信息为第一肯定应答信息或第一否定应答信息；
根据所述第一信息，确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息。
其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
图6示出了一种通信设备600的结构示意图，通信设备600例如为网络设备。该通信设备600可以实现上文中涉及的网络设备的功能。该通信设备600可以是上文中所述的网络设备，或者可以是设置在上文中所述的网络设备中的芯片。该通信设备600可以包括处理器601和收发器602。其中，处理器601可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S22，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发器602可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S21、S23和S27，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
例如，处理器601，用于确定调制编码方式信息；
处理器601，还用于确定第一信息和调制编码方式索引，所述第一信息和所述调制编 码方式索引用于指示所述调制编码方式信息；
收发器602，用于通过DCI发送所述第一信息。
其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
图7示出了一种通信设备700的结构示意图，该通信设备例如为终端设备。该通信设备700可以实现上文中涉及的终端设备的功能。该通信设备700可以是上文中所述的终端设备，或者可以是设置在上文中所述的终端设备中的芯片。该通信设备700可以包括处理器701，可选的，还可以包括收发器702。其中，处理器701可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中的S43和S44，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发器702可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中的S45，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
例如，处理器501，用于确定调制编码方式索引，所述调制编码方式索引为N个调制编码索引中的一个，所述N个调制编码索引包括以下至少一种：
从调制编码方式索引X到调制编码方式索引Y对应第一误块率，从索引Y+1到索引Z对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝X<＝Y<Z<＝N-1，N为大于1的整数；以及
从调制编码方式索引A到调制编码方式索引B对应第一误块率，调制编码方式索引C对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝A<C<B<＝N-1，N为大于2的整数；
处理器501，还用于确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息，所述调制编码方式信息包括调制方式、编码码率和误块率，其中所述误块率为至少两个误块率中的一个，所述至少两个误块率包括所述第一误块率和所述第二误块率。
其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
图8示出了一种通信设备800的结构示意图，该通信设备例如为网络设备。该通信设备800可以实现上文中涉及的网络设备的功能。该通信设备800可以是上文中所述的网络设备，或者可以是设置在上文中所述的网络设备中的芯片。该通信设备800可以包括处理器801和收发器802。其中，处理器801可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S41和S42，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发器802可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S45，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
例如，处理器801，用于确定调制编码方式信息，所述调制编码方式信息包括调制方式、编码码率和误块率，其中所述误块率为至少两个误块率中的一个，所述至少两个误块率包括所述第一误块率和所述第二误块率；
处理器801，还用于确定所述调制编码方式信息对应的调制编码方式索引，所述调制编码方式索引为N个调制编码索引中的一个，所述N个调制编码索引包括以下至少一种：
从调制编码方式索引X到调制编码方式索引Y对应第一误块率，从索引Y+1到索引Z对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝X<＝Y<Z<＝N-1，N为大于1的整数；以及
从调制编码方式索引A到调制编码方式索引B对应第一误块率，调制编码方式索引C对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝A<C<B<＝N-1，N为大于2的整数。
其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
在一个简单的实施例中，本领域的技术人员可以想到，还可以将通信设备500、通信设备600、通信设备700或通信设备800通过如图9A所示的通信装置900的结构实现。该 通信装置900可以实现上文中涉及的网络设备或终端设备的功能。该通信装置900可以包括处理器901。其中，在该通信装置900用于实现图2所示的实施例中的终端设备的功能时，处理器901可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S24、S25和S26，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。在该通信装置900用于实现图2所示的实施例中的网络设备的功能时，处理器901可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S22，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。在该通信装置900用于实现图4所示的实施例中的终端设备的功能时，处理器901可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中的S43和S44，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。在该通信装置900用于实现图4所示的实施例中的网络设备的功能时，处理器901可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中的S41和S42，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
其中，通信装置900可以通过现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array，FPGA)，专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，系统芯片(system on chip，SoC)，中央处理器(central processor unit，CPU)，网络处理器(network processor，NP)，数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor，DSP)，微控制器(micro controller unit，MCU)，还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device，PLD)或其他集成芯片实现，则通信装置600可被设置于本申请实施例的网络设备或通信设备中，以使得该网络设备或通信设备实现本申请实施例提供的传输消息的方法。
在一种可选实现方式中，该通信装置900可以包括收发组件，用于与网络设备进行通信。例如，在该通信装置900用于实现图2所示的实施例中的网络设备或终端设备的功能时，收发组件可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S21、S23和S27，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。在该通信装置900用于实现图4所示的实施例中的网络设备或终端设备的功能时，收发组件可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中的S45，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
在一种可选实现方式中，该通信装置900还可以包括存储器902，可参考图9B，其中，存储器902用于存储计算机程序或指令，处理器901用于译码和执行这些计算机程序或指令。应理解，这些计算机程序或指令可包括上述网络设备或终端设备的功能程序。当网络设备的功能程序被处理器901译码并执行时，可使得网络设备实现本申请实施例图2所示的实施例或图4所示的实施例所提供的通信方法中网络设备的功能。当终端设备的功能程序被处理器901译码并执行时，可使得终端设备实现本申请实施例的图2所示的实施例或图4所示的实施例所提供的通信方法中终端设备的功能。
在另一种可选实现方式中，这些网络设备或终端设备的功能程序存储在通信装置900外部的存储器中。当网络设备的功能程序被处理器901译码并执行时，存储器902中临时存放上述网络设备的功能程序的部分或全部内容。当终端设备的功能程序被处理器901译码并执行时，存储器902中临时存放上述终端设备的功能程序的部分或全部内容。
在另一种可选实现方式中，这些网络设备或终端设备的功能程序被设置于存储在通信装置900内部的存储器902中。当通信装置900内部的存储器902中存储有网络设备的功能程序时，通信装置900可被设置在本申请实施例的网络设备中。当通信装置900内部的存储器902中存储有终端设备的功能程序时，通信装置900可被设置在本申请实施例的终端设备中。
在又一种可选实现方式中，这些网络设备的功能程序的部分内容存储在通信装置900 外部的存储器中，这些网络设备的功能程序的其他部分内容存储在通信装置900内部的存储器902中。或，这些终端设备的功能程序的部分内容存储在通信装置900外部的存储器中，这些终端设备的功能程序的其他部分内容存储在通信装置900内部的存储器902中。
在本申请实施例中，通信设备600、通信设备600、通信设备700、通信设备800及通信装置900对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现，或者，可以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指ASIC，执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器，集成逻辑电路，和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。
另外，图5所示的实施例提供的通信设备500还可以通过其他形式实现。例如该通信设备包括处理模块和收发模块。例如处理模块可通过处理器501实现，收发模块可通过收发器502实现。其中，处理模块可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S24、S25和S26，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S21、S23和S27，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
例如，处理模块，用于确定调制编码方式索引；
处理模块，还用于确定第一信息，所述确定第一信息包括：
根据收发模块接收的DCI确定所述第一信息；和/或，
根据收发模块在第一时间窗内接收第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数确定所述第一信息，所述第一HARQ应答信息为第一肯定应答信息或第一否定应答信息；
根据所述第一信息，确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息。
其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
图6所示的实施例提供的通信设备600还可以通过其他形式实现。例如该通信设备包括处理模块和收发模块。例如处理模块可通过处理器601实现，收发模块可通过收发器602实现。其中，处理模块可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S22，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S21、S23和S27，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
例如，处理模块，用于确定调制编码方式信息；
处理模块，还用于确定第一信息和调制编码方式索引，所述第一信息和所述调制编码方式索引用于指示所述调制编码方式信息；
收发模块，用于通过DCI发送所述第一信息。
其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
图7所示的实施例提供的通信设备700还可以通过其他形式实现。例如该通信设备包括处理模块，可选的，还可以包括收发模块。例如处理模块可通过处理器701实现，收发模块可通过收发器702实现。其中，处理模块可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中的S43和S44，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中的S45，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
例如，处理模块，用于确定调制编码方式索引，所述调制编码方式索引为N个调制编码索引中的一个，所述N个调制编码索引包括以下至少一种：
从调制编码方式索引X到调制编码方式索引Y对应第一误块率，从索引Y+1到索引 Z对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝X<＝Y<Z<＝N-1，N为大于1的整数；以及
从调制编码方式索引A到调制编码方式索引B对应第一误块率，调制编码方式索引C对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝A<C<B<＝N-1，N为大于2的整数；
处理模块，还用于确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息，所述调制编码方式信息包括调制方式、编码码率和误块率，其中所述误块率为至少两个误块率中的一个，所述至少两个误块率包括所述第一误块率和所述第二误块率。
其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
另外，图8所示的实施例提供的通信设备800还可以通过其他形式实现。例如该通信设备包括处理模块和收发模块。例如处理模块可通过处理器801实现，收发模块可通过收发器802实现。其中，处理模块可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S41和S42，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中的S45，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
例如，处理模块，用于确定调制编码方式信息，所述调制编码方式信息包括调制方式、编码码率和误块率，其中所述误块率为至少两个误块率中的一个，所述至少两个误块率包括所述第一误块率和所述第二误块率；
处理模块，还用于确定所述调制编码方式信息对应的调制编码方式索引，所述调制编码方式索引为N个调制编码索引中的一个，所述N个调制编码索引包括以下至少一种：
从调制编码方式索引X到调制编码方式索引Y对应第一误块率，从索引Y+1到索引Z对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝X<＝Y<Z<＝N-1，N为大于1的整数；以及
从调制编码方式索引A到调制编码方式索引B对应第一误块率，调制编码方式索引C对应第二误块率，其中，0<＝A<C<B<＝N-1，N为大于2的整数。
其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
由于本申请实施例提供的通信设备500、通信设备600、通信设备700、通信设备800及通信装置900可用于执行图2所示的实施例或图4所示的实施例所提供的通信方法，因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例是参照根据本申请实施例的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器，使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令 可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，数字通用光盘(digital versatile disc，DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如，固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD))等。
显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本申请实施例进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样，倘若本申请实施例的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。

Claims (30)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    确定调制编码方式索引；
    根据接收的下行控制信息DCI确定第一信息；
    根据所述第一信息，确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息；
    其中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所在的搜索空间，所述DCI所在的搜索空间为公共搜索空间或用户专用搜索空间。
  2. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    确定调制编码方式信息；
    确定第一信息和调制编码方式索引，所述第一信息和所述调制编码方式索引用于指示所述调制编码方式信息；
    通过下行控制信息DCI发送所述调制编码方式索引；
    其中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所在的搜索空间，所述DCI所在的搜索空间为公共搜索空间或用户专用搜索空间。
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述公共搜索空间对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述用户专用搜索空间对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息，所述第二调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息。
  5. 如权利要求3或4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一调制编码方式信息和所述第二调制编码方式信息不同。
  6. 如权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，根据接收的DCI确定所述第一信息，所述第一信息还包括以下至少一种：
    所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格；
    所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值；
    所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔；和，
    所述DCI所指示的非周期信道状态信息A-CSI。
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格，所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格为多个调制编码方式表格中的至少一个，
    所述多个调制编码方式表格包括第一调制编码方式表格和第二调制编码方式表格，所述第一调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
  8. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值为多个调制编码方式索引偏移值中的至少一个，
    所述多个调制编码方式索引偏移值包括第一调制编码方式索引偏移值和第二调制编 码方式索引偏移值，所述第一调制编码方式索引偏移值对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二调制编码方式索引偏移值对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
  9. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔，所述反馈时间间隔为从发送第二信息包含的数据到所述终端设备发送所述数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息之间的时间间隔，或，为从调度所述第二信息的DCI到所述终端设备发送所述第二信息之间的时间间隔，所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔属于多个时间间隔集合中的至少一个，
    所述多个时间间隔集合包括第一时间间隔集合和第二时间间隔集合，所述第一时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
  10. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或所述DCI中所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，还包括所述DCI的格式，
    所述DCI的格式为第一DCI格式，所述DCI包括第一比特信息域和第二比特信息域；
    所述确定第一信息，包括：
    根据所述第一比特信息域，确定所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，其中，所述第一比特信息域的比特数大于或等于1，所述第二比特信息域包括以下的一种：
    所述第二比特信息域的比特数小于或等于2，所述第二比特信息域用于指示从所述第二信息到HARQ应答信息的反馈时间；
    所述第二比特信息域的比特数小于或等于3，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述第二信息占用的时域资源；
    所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于1，所述第二比特信息域用于指示冗余版本，所述冗余版本版为0或3；
    所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于1，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述终端设备的发送功率命令字，所述发送功率命令字为0或3；和，
    所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于4，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述调制编码方式索引。
  11. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的A-CSI，
    所述DCI所指示的A-CSI为多个A-CSI中的至少一个，所述多个A-CSI包括第一CSI和第二CSI，所述第一CSI对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二CSI对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息；和/或，
    所述DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI对应于多个误块率，所述多个误块率包括最高误块率和最低误块率；所述最高误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述最低误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息，或，所述最低误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对 应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述最高误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
  12. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定第一信息包括：根据在第一时间窗内接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，确定所述第一信息，所述第一信息还包括以下至少一项：
    在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数；
    在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数；
    在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值；和，
    在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值。
  13. 如权利要求3-5、7-12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二调制编码方式信息对应的误块率小于所述第一调制编码方式信息对应的误块率；或，
    所述第二调制编码方式信息对应的误块率的优先级高于所述第一调制编码方式信息对应的误块率的优先级。
  14. 一种通信设备，其特征在于，包括处理模块和收发模块；
    所述处理模块，用于确定调制编码方式索引；
    所述处理模块，还用于根据所述收发模块接收的下行控制信息DCI确定第一信息；
    所述处理模块，还根据所述第一信息，确定所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息；
    其中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所在的搜索空间，所述DCI所在的搜索空间为公共搜索空间或用户专用搜索空间。
  15. 一种通信设备，其特征在于，包括处理模块与收发模块；
    所述处理模块，用于确定调制编码方式信息；
    所述处理模块，还用于确定第一信息和调制编码方式索引，所述第一信息和所述调制编码方式索引用于指示所述调制编码方式信息；
    所述收发模块，用于通过下行控制信息DCI发送所述调制编码方式索引；
    其中，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所在的搜索空间，所述DCI所在的搜索空间为公共搜索空间或用户专用搜索空间。
  16. 如权利要求14或15所述的设备，其特征在于，所述公共搜索空间对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述用户专用搜索空间对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
  17. 如权利要求16所述的设备，其特征在于，所述第一调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息，所述第二调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息。
  18. 如权利要求16或17所述的设备，其特征在于，所述第一调制编码方式信息和所 述第二调制编码方式信息不同。
  19. 如权利要求14-18中任一项所述的设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块用于根据所述收发模块接收的DCI确定所述第一信息，所述第一信息还包括以下至少一种：
    所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格；
    所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值；
    所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔；和
    所述DCI所指示的非周期信道状态信息A-CSI。
  20. 如权利要求19所述的设备，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格，所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格为多个调制编码方式表格中的至少一个，
    所述多个调制编码方式表格包括第一调制编码方式表格和第二调制编码方式表格，所述第一调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二调制编码方式表格中包括的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
  21. 如权利要求19所述的设备，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值为多个调制编码方式索引偏移值中的至少一个，
    所述多个调制编码方式索引偏移值包括第一调制编码方式索引偏移值和第二调制编码方式索引偏移值，所述第一调制编码方式索引偏移值对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二调制编码方式索引偏移值对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
  22. 如权利要求19所述的设备，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔，所述反馈时间间隔为从发送第二信息包含的数据到所述终端设备发送所述数据对应的第二HARQ应答信息之间的时间间隔，或，为从调度所述第二信息的DCI到所述终端设备发送所述第二信息之间的时间间隔，所述DCI所指示的反馈时间间隔属于多个时间间隔集合中的至少一个，
    所述多个时间间隔集合包括第一时间间隔集合和第二时间间隔集合，所述第一时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二时间间隔集合包括的所述反馈时间间隔对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
  23. 如权利要求19所述的设备，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或所述DCI中所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，还包括所述DCI的格式，
    所述DCI的格式为第一DCI格式，所述DCI包括第一比特信息域和第二比特信息域；
    所述确定第一信息，包括：
    根据所述第一比特信息域，确定所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式表格和/或所述DCI所指示的调制编码方式索引偏移值，其中，所述第一比特信息域的比特数大于或等于1，所述第二比特信息域包括以下的一种：
    所述第二比特信息域的比特数小于或等于2，所述第二比特信息域用于指示从所述第二信息到HARQ应答信息的反馈时间；
    所述第二比特信息域的比特数小于或等于3，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述第二信息占用的时域资源；
    所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于1，所述第二比特信息域用于指示冗余版本，所述冗余版本版为0或3；
    所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于1，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述终端设备的发送功率命令字，所述发送功率命令字为0或3；和，
    所述第二比特信息域的比特数等于4，所述第二比特信息域用于指示所述调制编码方式索引。
  24. 如权利要求19所述的设备，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述DCI所指示的A-CSI，
    所述DCI所指示的A-CSI为多个A-CSI中的至少一个，所述多个A-CSI包括第一CSI和第二CSI，所述第一CSI对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述第二CSI对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息；和/或
    所述DCI指示的A-CSI包括的CSI对应于多个误块率，所述多个误块率包括最高误块率和最低误块率；所述最高误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述最低误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息，或，所述最低误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第一调制编码方式信息，所述最高误块率对应的所述调制编码方式索引对应的调制编码方式信息为第二调制编码方式信息。
  25. 如权利要求14-18中任一项所述的设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块具体用于：根据所述收发模块在第一时间窗内接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，确定所述第一信息，所述第一信息还包括以下至少一项：
    在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数；
    在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数；
    在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一否定应答信息的次数和/或未接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值；和，
    在所述第一时间窗内接收所述第一肯定应答信息的次数，与在所述第一时间窗内应接收所述第一HARQ应答信息的总次数之间的比值。
  26. 如权利要求16-18、20-25中任一项所述的设备，其特征在于，
    所述第二调制编码方式信息对应的误块率小于所述第一调制编码方式信息对应的误块率；或，
    所述第二调制编码方式信息对应的误块率的优先级高于所述第一调制编码方式信息对应的误块率的优先级。
  27. 一种计算机存储介质，其特征在于，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被通信设备执行时，使得所述通信设备执行如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的通信方法。
  28. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被通信设备执行时，使得所述通信设备执行如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的通信方法。
  29. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述处理器执行存储器中存储的指令，使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的通信方法。
  30. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括终端设备与网络设备，所述终端设备用于执行如权利要求1或权利要求3-13中任一项所述的通信方法；所述网络设备用于执行如权利要求2-13中任一项所述的通信方法。
PCT/CN2019/070510 2018-01-12 2019-01-04 一种通信方法及设备 Ceased WO2019137316A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP19739149.3A EP3734877A4 (en) 2018-01-12 2019-01-04 COMMUNICATION PROCESS AND DEVICE
BR112020014167-4A BR112020014167A2 (pt) 2018-01-12 2019-01-04 Método de comunicação, dispositivo de comunicações, meio de armazenamento legível por computador e aparelho de comunicações
JP2020538050A JP7027669B2 (ja) 2018-01-12 2019-01-04 通信方法及び通信デバイス
US16/925,670 US11362758B2 (en) 2018-01-12 2020-07-10 Communication method and communications device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810033549.9A CN110034859B (zh) 2018-01-12 2018-01-12 一种通信方法及设备
CN201810033549.9 2018-01-12

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/925,670 Continuation US11362758B2 (en) 2018-01-12 2020-07-10 Communication method and communications device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019137316A1 true WO2019137316A1 (zh) 2019-07-18

Family

ID=67219379

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/070510 Ceased WO2019137316A1 (zh) 2018-01-12 2019-01-04 一种通信方法及设备

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (1) US11362758B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP3734877A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP7027669B2 (zh)
CN (1) CN110034859B (zh)
BR (1) BR112020014167A2 (zh)
WO (1) WO2019137316A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2023504886A (ja) * 2019-12-06 2023-02-07 中興通訊股▲ふん▼有限公司 初期ｍｃｓ値確定方法、電子デバイス及び記憶媒体

Families Citing this family (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109952802B (zh) * 2017-08-09 2023-07-21 瑞典爱立信有限公司 用于发送下行链路控制信息的方法和设备
US11546936B2 (en) * 2018-05-09 2023-01-03 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Procedures for multiple active bandwidth parts
US12047168B2 (en) 2018-09-28 2024-07-23 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Method and apparatus for generating a CSI report
CN109891948B (zh) * 2019-01-30 2022-02-22 北京小米移动软件有限公司 检测下行传输、传输配置信息和下行传输的方法及装置
EP3925270B1 (en) * 2019-02-15 2025-04-09 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Radio link monitoring
US20210037555A1 (en) * 2019-07-29 2021-02-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Scheduling for services with multiple priority types
CN112398576B (zh) * 2019-08-16 2022-08-26 华为技术有限公司 一种确定调制编码的方法及通信装置
CN114342286B (zh) * 2019-08-23 2024-06-25 华为技术有限公司 一种数据传输方法和通信设备
WO2021068266A1 (zh) * 2019-10-12 2021-04-15 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置
WO2022104605A1 (zh) * 2020-11-18 2022-05-27 北京小米移动软件有限公司 调制与编码策略mcs的配置方法、装置及通信设备
WO2022244496A1 (ja) * 2021-05-20 2022-11-24 株式会社Ｎｔｔドコモ 端末、無線通信システム及び無線通信方法
JP7580345B2 (ja) * 2021-06-28 2024-11-11 Kddi株式会社 柔軟な無線中継のための中継装置並びにその中継方法、通信装置並びにその通信方法、及びプログラム
US20230164701A1 (en) * 2021-11-24 2023-05-25 Apple Inc. Power control for signal interference management
CN115208511B (zh) * 2022-05-27 2024-04-26 浪潮通信技术有限公司 调制与编码策略的配置方法、装置及电子设备

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101959284A (zh) * 2010-09-30 2011-01-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 控制信息传输方法及装置
CN103580788A (zh) * 2012-07-27 2014-02-12 电信科学技术研究院 一种传输mcs指示信息的方法及装置
US20170295593A1 (en) * 2012-12-17 2017-10-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving mcs index for 256qam in wireless access system

Family Cites Families (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102265695B (zh) * 2011-06-17 2013-10-09 华为技术有限公司 一种调度方法及设备、控制信息的处理方法及设备
US9826514B2 (en) 2011-11-16 2017-11-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Downlink control information (DCI) design for low cost devices
WO2013187743A1 (ko) * 2012-06-15 2013-12-19 엘지전자 주식회사 고정된 경로를 이동하는 고속 이동체를 위한 무선 통신 시스템
KR20160051758A (ko) * 2013-09-03 2016-05-11 삼성전자주식회사 다운링크 전송 방법 및 사용자 단말 장치
US9894675B2 (en) * 2013-09-19 2018-02-13 Blackberry Limited Method and device for wireless network coexistence
US20160226623A1 (en) * 2013-09-20 2016-08-04 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Network Node, User Equipment and Methods for Obtaining a Modulation and Coding Scheme
US9112759B2 (en) * 2013-10-04 2015-08-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Adaptive LNA operation for shared LNA receiver for carrier aggregation
JPWO2015099173A1 (ja) 2013-12-27 2017-03-23 シャープ株式会社 端末装置および基地局装置
US10757726B2 (en) * 2013-12-27 2020-08-25 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Terminal device, base station device, and communication method using channel quality indicator (CQI) tables and modulation coding scheme (MCS) tables to determine modulation scheme
CN104753633B (zh) 2013-12-31 2019-06-14 中兴通讯股份有限公司 高阶编码处理方法、装置和系统
CN103746776A (zh) 2014-01-24 2014-04-23 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 数据传输方法、数据传输装置和基站
US10075309B2 (en) 2014-04-25 2018-09-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Modulation coding scheme (MCS) indication in LTE uplink
CN104202115B (zh) * 2014-05-09 2019-05-07 中兴通讯股份有限公司 高阶编码的调制处理方法及装置、基站、终端
CN106961318B (zh) * 2016-01-11 2020-07-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种确定编码调制参数的方法、装置和系统
US11129152B2 (en) * 2016-02-04 2021-09-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and user equipment for receiving dowlink control information, and method and base station for transmitting dowlink control information
WO2017171956A1 (en) * 2016-03-28 2017-10-05 Intel IP Corporation Uplink modulation coding scheme and configuration
US11057925B2 (en) * 2016-08-07 2021-07-06 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Deactivation timer in a wireless device and wireless network
US10517110B2 (en) * 2016-08-10 2019-12-24 Ofinno, Llc Cell configuration for V2X communications in a wireless network
US11147064B2 (en) * 2017-09-07 2021-10-12 Ofinno, Llc Resource selection for data multiplexing
US11831436B2 (en) * 2017-09-28 2023-11-28 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc HARQ feedback for grant-free transmission

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101959284A (zh) * 2010-09-30 2011-01-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 控制信息传输方法及装置
CN103580788A (zh) * 2012-07-27 2014-02-12 电信科学技术研究院 一种传输mcs指示信息的方法及装置
US20170295593A1 (en) * 2012-12-17 2017-10-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving mcs index for 256qam in wireless access system

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP3734877A4

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2023504886A (ja) * 2019-12-06 2023-02-07 中興通訊股▲ふん▼有限公司 初期ｍｃｓ値確定方法、電子デバイス及び記憶媒体
JP7385039B2 (ja) 2019-12-06 2023-11-21 中興通訊股▲ふん▼有限公司 初期ｍｃｓ値確定方法、電子デバイス及び記憶媒体

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US11362758B2 (en) 2022-06-14
CN110034859B (zh) 2021-06-08
JP7027669B2 (ja) 2022-03-02
BR112020014167A2 (pt) 2020-12-08
US20200343995A1 (en) 2020-10-29
CN110034859A (zh) 2019-07-19
EP3734877A1 (en) 2020-11-04
JP2021510264A (ja) 2021-04-15
EP3734877A4 (en) 2021-03-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110034859B (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
JP7392035B2 (ja) 物理アップリンクデータチャンネルで制御情報多重化
US11509424B2 (en) Method and apparatus for grant free based data transmission in wireless communication system
CN113692768B (zh) 无线通信系统中免许可数据传输的方法和装置
US11870584B2 (en) Method and apparatus for grant free based data transmission in wireless communication system
US10772085B2 (en) Short PUCCH formats and scheduling request (SR) transmission for 5th generation (5G) new radio access technology (NR)
US10841904B2 (en) Short physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) design for 5th generation (5G) new radio (NR)
JP5666704B2 (ja) 複数のコンポーネントキャリアのための物理アップリンク制御チャネルリソース割り振り
CN102835059B (zh) 针对多个载波的控制信息的反馈
JP7150858B2 (ja) 通信方法、ｍｃｓ受信方法、ｍｃｓ通知方法、およびデバイス
US11330595B2 (en) Method for sending control information, method for receiving control information, and apparatus
US20130083741A1 (en) Channel Selection and Channel-State Information Collision Handling
CN110519019B (zh) 一种发送、接收码本信息的方法及装置
KR20200004342A (ko) 5G(5th GENERATION) NR(NEW RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY)에 대한 짧은 PUCCH 포맷들 및 SR(SCHEDULING REQUEST) 송신
EP3577830A1 (en) SHORT PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL (PUCCH) DESIGN FOR 5th GENERATION (5G) NEW RADIO (NR)
WO2019160809A2 (en) Simultaneous harq-ack and sr transmission on nr pucch
WO2017050078A1 (zh) 上行控制信息的发送、获取方法及装置
CN113767684B (zh) 无线通信系统中频域资源分配的方法和装置
EP3665806B1 (en) Method and apparatus for resource allocation in wireless communication
US12426058B2 (en) Method and apparatus for periodic data transmission and reception in wireless communication system
WO2019141232A1 (zh) 一种通信、mcs的接收、通知方法及设备
TWI794078B (zh) 載波切換的傳輸處理方法、裝置及處理器可讀存儲介質

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19739149

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020538050

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019739149

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20200728

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112020014167

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112020014167

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20200710